FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 2-Way Portable Radio (with Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE and WIFI)

 

APX8000_M3_FrontCover.fm Page 1 Friday, April 3, 2015 4:32 PM APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX 8000 MODEL 3 USER GUIDE QR-Card.fm Page 1 Monday, June 1, 2015 2:26 PM m ASTRO APX 8000 Series Digital Portable Radios Quick Reference Card RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Radio Controls Top (Orange) Button __________ Microphone Accessory Connector Home Button Keypad 3-Position A/B/C Switch __________ 2-Position Concentric Switch __________ Main Display Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button 4-Way Navigation Button 16-Position Select Knob __________ On/Off/Volume Control Knob Top Side (Select) Button __________ PTT Button Side Button 1 __________ Side Button 2 __________ Radio On/Off Antenna Top Display Microphone Main Speaker Bluetooth Pairing Indicator Battery On On/Off/Volume knob clockwise. Off On/Off/Volume knob counterclockwise. Zones and Channels Zone Toggle the Zone switch or use the radio menu to the desired zone. Channel Turn the Channel knob or use the radio menu to the desired channel. Receiving and Transmitting 1 Select zone/channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. OR Press and hold Volume Set button. OR Press Monitor button and listen for activity. 3 Adjust volume, if necessary. 4 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive. Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press and hold the Emergency button*. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone/channel. Radio sounds a short, medium-pitched tone, and the LED blinks red momentarily. 3 When acknowledgment is received, you hear four beeps; alarm ends; and radio exits emergency.

* Default timer of Emergency button press to activate Emergency is 50 milliseconds. This timer is programmable, see Emergency Operation in the user guide for details. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2015 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. 06/15 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A.

*PMLN7287A*

PMLN7287A English QR-Card.fm Page 2 Monday, June 1, 2015 2:26 PM Sending an Emergency Call 1 Press the Emergency button. 2 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to end call. 4 Press and hold Emergency button to exit emergency. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Call 1 Press the Emergency button. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. 3 Silent emergency continues until you:

Press and hold the Emergency button to exit emergency state. OR Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Display Status Icons u t 8 Blinks when the battery is low. Transmitting a call or data. Receiving a call or data. English v O M HOR . i j k The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site

(trunking only). Direct radio to radio communication or connected through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater This channel is being monitored. L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-Two Channel during scan. The vote scan feature is enabled. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Menu Navigation

< or > to Menu Entry. m l G n o b a On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = GPS enabled, and signal available. Off = GPS disabled. Blinking = GPS enabled, but signal unavailable. On = User is currently associated with Off = User is currently not associated the radio. with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. Bluetooth is ready. Bluetooth is connected to the device. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represent the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal.

{, |, or } directly below Menu Entry to select. H to exit. U or D to scroll through sub-list.

{, |, or } directly below Menu Entry to select. Contents Documentation Copyrights...........15 Declaration of Conformity.........................8 Disclaimer.......................................16 Important Safety Information........10 Software Version............................11 Canada)....................................................11 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Consignes de scurit importantes.................................12 Version logicielle........................... 13 Canada)....................................................13 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Computer Software Copyrights....14 Getting Started...............................17 How to Use This Guide..................................17 Notations Used in This Manual......................17 Additional Performance Enhancement.......... 18 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.................18 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR).... 18 CrossTalk Prevention..........................18 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID).........18 SecureNet...........................................18 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements......................18 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................19 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......20 Charging the Battery......................................20 Attaching the Battery..................................... 20 English C o n t e n t s 1 Attaching the Antenna................................... 21 Removing and Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover...................................... 22 Using the Carry Holder.................................. 23 Turning On the Radio.................................... 25 Adjusting the Volume.....................................26 Identifying Radio Controls............27 Radio Parts and Controls...............................27 Programmable Features................................28 Assignable Radio Functions............... 29 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions....................................... 32 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.....33 Menu Select Buttons...........................33 Home Button.......................................33 4-Way Navigation Button.................... 34 Data Feature Button............................34 Keypad...........................................................34 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..............................................34 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..............................................36 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode..............................................37 s t n e t n o C 2 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode..............................................38 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................39 Identifying Status Indicators.........40 Status Icons...................................................40 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.....44 TMS Status Icons................................45 TMS Menu Options.............................46 Call Type Icons..............................................46 LED Indicator.................................................47 Intelligent Lighting Indicators......................... 48 Alert Tones.................................................... 49 Phone Call Displays and Alerts..................... 54 General Radio Operation...............56 Selecting a Zone............................................56 Selecting a Radio Channel............................ 57 Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button....................................................... 57 Mode Select Feature..................................... 58 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey...........................................59 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button............................................ 59 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 59 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call................................60 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)...........60 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).....61 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................61 Making a Talkgroup Call..................... 62 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 62 Making an Enhanced Private Call

(Trunking Only).............................. 63 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 64 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button...................................... 65 Monitor Feature............................................. 65 Monitoring a Channel..........................66 Monitoring Conventional Mode........... 66 Advanced Features........................68 Advanced Call Features................................ 68 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)........................ 68 Talkgroup Call Feature

(Conventional Operation Only)...... 69 Sending a Status Call......................... 70 Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only).............................................. 70 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....72 Contacts.........................................................74 Making a Private Call from Contacts...75 Adding a New Contact Entry...............76 Deleting a Contact Entry.....................77 Adding a Contact to a Call List............77 Removing a Contact from a Call List................................................. 78 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................... 78 Viewing Details of a Contact...............80 Scan Lists...................................................... 80 Viewing a Scan List.............................80 Editing the Scan List........................... 80 Changing the Scan List Status............81 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status.............................................82 Scan...............................................................83 Turning Scan On or Off.......................83 C o n t e n t s 3 English Making a Dynamic Priority Change

(Conventional Scan Only)..............83 Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 83 Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 84 Call Alert Paging............................................84 Receiving a Call Alert Page................ 84 Sending a Call Alert Page...................85 Emergency Operation....................................86 Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 87 Sending an Emergency Call

(Trunking Only).............................. 88 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call............................. 88 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm.... 89 Change of Channels during Emergency.....................................89 Emergency Keep-Alive Feature..........90 Fireground (Conventional Only).....................90 Entering Fireground Zone Channel.....91 Responding to Evacuation Indicator... 92 Tactical Public Safety (TPS)

(Conventional Only)..................................92 Using TPS Normal Transmission........92 Using TPS Emergency Transmission................................. 92 Man Down......................................................93 Pre-Alert Timer....................................95 Post-Alert Timer..................................95 Radio Alerts When Man Down Feature is Triggered...................... 95 Triggering Emergency.........................95 Radio Alerts When Man Down Enhanced is Triggered...................96 Exiting Man Down Feature..................96 Re-Initiating Man Down.......................97 Testing the Man Down Feature...........97 Automatic Registration Service (ARS)...........97 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode..............................................98 User Login Feature............................. 98 Text Messaging Service (TMS)................... 100 Accessing the Messaging Features..101 Composing and Sending a New Text Message.............................. 102 Sending a Quick Text Message........103 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message............... 104 ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution..111 System Setup for ASTRO Advanced Messaging Solution.... 112 Two-Factor Authentication................112 Sending a Query...............................115 Receiving a Query............................ 116 Secure Operations.......................................117 s t n e t n o C 4 English Selecting Secure Transmissions.......117 Selecting Clear Transmissions......... 117 Managing Encryption........................ 118 Security........................................................123 Radio Lock........................................123 Radio Stun and Kill...................................... 126 Radio Stun........................................ 126 Radio Kill...........................................127 Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System....................128 GPS Operation..................................128 GPS Performance Enhancement......129 The Outdoor Location Feature

(Using GPS).................................129 Military Grid Reference System

(MGRS) Coordinates................... 130 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature........................................ 130 Saving a Waypoint............................131 Viewing a Saved Waypoint............... 132 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint......... 132 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint......................................133 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....134 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...........135 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint.. 135 Location Feature in Emergency Mode............................................136 Trunking System Controls........................... 136 Operating in Failsoft System.............136 Out-of-Range Radio..........................137 Site Trunking Feature....................... 137 Locking and Unlocking a Site............137 Site Display and Search Button........ 138 Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth-........ 138 Turning On Bluetooth .......................139 Turning Off the Bluetooth..................139 Re-Pair Timer....................................140 Bluetooth Drop Timer........................141 Pairing with Low Frequency-

Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-

MPP) Feature.............................. 142 Radio Indications of Lost Bluetooth Connection...................................143 Standard Pairing Feature..................144 PIN Authentication in Pairing............ 146 Turning On the Bluetooth Audio

(Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset)..................150 Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio

(Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio)..................150 C o n t e n t s 5 English Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device....... 151 Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information.......................151 Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information...................................152 Editing the Bluetooth Friendly Name........................................... 153 Over-the-Air Programming (POP 25, ASTRO 25, ASTRO Conventional and Wi-Fi)...................................................... 153 Responding to the Notification of Upgrade....................................... 154 Voice Announcement...................................154 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..............155 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site...............................................156 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry.................. 157 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites.............................................158 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites............................. 158 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site....................................159 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry....... 159 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites.............................................160 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites............................. 161 Wi-Fi............................................................ 161 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.....................161 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............... 162 Utilities......................................................... 163 Viewing Recent Calls........................163 Using the Flip Display....................... 163 Selecting a Basic Zone Bank............164 Selecting an Enhanced Zone Bank.. 164 Selecting the Power Level................ 165 Selecting a Radio Profile...................165 Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias............................................. 166 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 166 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad and Controls................................ 167 Turning the Controls and Keypad Buttons Tones On or Off..............167 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...........167 Using the Time-Out Timer.................168 Time and Date Setup........................168 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features......................170 s t n e t n o C 6 English Using the PL Defeat Feature............ 170 Digital PTT ID Support......................171 Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)............................................ 171 Transmit Inhibit................................. 172 IMPRES Battery Annunciator............173 General Radio Information................173 Helpful Tips.................................. 177 Radio Care...................................................177 Cleaning Your Radio.........................178 Proper Ways to Handle the Radio.... 178 Radio Service and Repair.................179 Battery Care.................................................179 Battery Charge Status.......................179 Battery Recycling and Disposal........ 180 Accessories..................................182 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range..................... 183 Special Channel Assignments.....................183 Emergency Channel......................... 183 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 183 Operating Frequency Requirements............183 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............186 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources............................186 C o n t e n t s Glossary........................................187 Limited Warranty..........................193 PRODUCTS........................................... 193 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 193 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 194 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................195 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.195 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................195 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 196 VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................197 VIII. For Australia Only:................................197 7 English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX 8000 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 8 English Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 9 English This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. n o i t a m r o n f I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 10 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R14.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 174 to determine your radio software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of the Industry Canada rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. S o f t w a r e V e r s o n i 11 English les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes, des batteries et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i 12 English Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R14.00.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et RSS 210 du rglement d'Industrie Canada selon les conditions numres ci-dessous:

Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. V e r s o n i l i o g c e i l l e 13 English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C 14 English Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. D o c u m e n t a t i o n C o p y r i g h t s 15 English Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. i r e m a c s D i l 16 English Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX Portables. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. Warning An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. Caution An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in G e t t i n g S a r t t e d damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. Note An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Phon Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. 17 English Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-

Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 English G e t t i n g S a r t t e d single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. Note User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator for the correct radio settings, if the radio is to be operated in extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C). You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Note Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 19 English Attaching the Battery If your radio is preprogrammed with volatile-key retention, the encryption keys are retained for approximately 30 seconds after battery removal. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. You can view the status of the IMPRES battery if the radio is using an IMPRES battery. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 173 for more information. 1 Slide the battery into the radio frame until the side latches click into place. Preparing Your Radio for Use Charging the Battery Warning To avoid a possible explosion:

Do not replace the battery in any area labeled hazardous atmosphere. Do not discard batteries in a fire. The Motorola-approved battery shipped with your radio is uncharged. Prior to using a new battery, charge it for a minimum of 16 hours to ensure optimum capacity and performance. For a list of Motorola-authorized batteries and chargers available for use with your radio, see Accessories on page 182. Note When charging a battery attached to a radio, the radio must be turned off. To charge the battery, place the battery (with or without the radio) in a Motorola-approved charger. The LED on the charger indicates the charging progress; see the charger user guide. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 20 English P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 2 To remove the battery, squeeze the release at the bottom of the battery until the latches battery releases from the radio and remove the battery from the radio. Note When removing the battery, ensure that the radio is turned off. Attaching the Antenna Ensure the radio is turned off before attaching the antenna. 1 Set the antenna in its receptacle. 2 Turn the antenna clockwise to attach to the radio. 21 English A Removing and Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover The accessory connector is on the antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect accessories to the radio. Note To prevent damage to the connector, shield it with the connector cover when not in use. 1 To remove the accessory connector cover, rotate the thumbscrew disengages from the radio. counterclockwise until it 3 To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. Note When removing the antenna, ensure that the radio is turned off. Note If the thumbscrew is too tight, use an Allen wrench at to loosen it first. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 22 English Using the Carry Holder 1 Position the radio within the carry holder with the main speaker facing outward. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 2 Slide the radio down into the carry holder until it clicks in place. 23 English 2 Rotate and lift the connector cover to disengage it from the radio. 3 To attach the accessory connector cover, insert of the cover into the slot above the hooked end the connector. 4 Press downward on the covers top to seat it in the slot. 5 Once in place, tighten by rotating the thumbscrew clockwise by hand. CBA 3 To remove the radio from the carry holder, place the tip of your fingers on the ledge of the carry holder. 4 Push at the bottom of the radio until the radio is released from it. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 24 English P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f Turning On the Radio 1 Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise until you hear a click. o r U s e If the power-up test is successful, you see a splash screen on the radio display, followed by the Home screen. If the power-up test is unsuccessful, you see Error XX/YY (XX/YY is an alphanumeric code). Note If the radio fails to power-up after repeating a few times, record the Error XX/YY code and contact your dealer. 25 English 1 To increase the volume, rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise. 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. 2 To turn off the radio, rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob counterclockwise until you hear a click. e s U r o f i o d a R Adjusting the Volume Ensure the radio is power on and the main speaker is pointed towards you for increased loudness and intelligibility, especially in areas with loud background noises. r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 26 English A Identifying Radio Controls Radio Parts and Controls I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 1 2 3 4 5 Antenna LED Top (Orange) Button[1]

Microphone Accessory Connector 27 English 101112131498123456715161718198202122232425 Home Button 6 4Way Navigation Button 7 Battery Latch 8 Keypad 9 10 Data Feature Button 11 Menu Select Buttons 12 Main Display 13 14 15 On/Off/Volume Control Knob 16 17 18 19 20 21 Top Side (Select) Button[1]

Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Side Button 1[1]

Side Button 2[1]

Battery Bluetooth Pairing Location Indicator 2Position Concentric Switch[1]

3Position A/B/C Switch[1]

22 Main Speaker 23 Microphone 24 Top Display 16Position Select Knob[1]

25 Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/

groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Pressing and releasing rapidly. Press Long press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 28 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. English Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions Bluetooth On/Off Allows you to turn on/off the Bluetooth Configuration Bluetooth Audio Reroute Bluetooth Headset PTT Bluetooth Data Devices Bluetooth Clear All Pairing Bluetooth Inquiry On/Off Bluetooth. Allows you to access to the Bluetooth menu. Allows you to toggle the audio route between radio speaker or Remote Speaker Microphone and Bluetooth headset. Keys up the Bluetooth Headset microphone. Pairs with the data devices for data transfer. Allows you to clear all pairing information for Bluetooth. This is accessed by a long press of the Bluetooth On/Off Button. Enables Bluetooth Search feature. Bluetooth Discoverable On/Off Call Alert Call Response Channel Contacts Dynamic ID

(Conventional Only) Dynamic Priority

(Conventional Only) Emergency Enables Bluetooth visibility. This is accessed by a long press of the Bluetooth Inquiry On/Off Button. Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Allows you to answer a private call. Selects a channel. Selects the Contacts menu. Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 29 English Information Internet Protocol Address Location Displays the information of the radio. Display the Internet Protocol

(IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Determines the current location

(latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Man Down Clear Clears the alarm of Man Down l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 30 English Message Mode Select mode which was triggered when your radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and a motion sensitivity level. Enters the current message list. Long-press programs a button with the current zone and channel of the radio; once programmed, the short-press of that button changes the radio Monitor

(Conventional Only) Multiple Private Line

(Conventional Only) Nuisance Delete One Touch 1 4 Phone zone channel to the programmed zone and channel. Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Private Call

(Trunking Only) Private Line Defeat

(Conventional Only) Query Radio Profiles Recent Calls Rekey Request Repeater Access Button (RAB)

(Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Overrides any coded squelch

(DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Launches a list of predefined short text messages only after successfully logged in the two-

Factor Authentification. Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Notifies the dispatcher you want a new encryption key. Allows user to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request

(Trunking Only) Request-To-Talk

(Conventional Only) Scan Scan List Programming Secure Transmission Select

(Conventional and Trunking) Selective Call

(Conventional Only) Site Display/

Search (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Notifies the dispatcher you want to send a voice call. Toggles scan on or off. Selects the scan list for editing

(by long press on the Scan button). Toggles the Secure Transmission On or Off when the Secure/Clear Strapping fields is set to Select for the current channel and when the radio is model/option capable. Calls an assigned radio. Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple 31 English Site Lock/Unlock

(Trunking Only) Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Talkaround/Direct

(Conventional Only) Talkgroup

(Conventional Only) Text Messaging Service (TMS) TMS Quick Text User Zone Select Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Locks onto a specific site. Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Selects the text messaging menu. Selects a predefined message. Automatically registers with the server. Allows selection from a list of zones. Basic Zone Bank Provides access from up to 6 zones by toggling between 2 banks of 3 zones, one group of 3 (A, B and C) to a second group of 3 zones (D, E and F). Provides access from up to 75 zones by toggling between 25 banks (A, B ... X or Y) of 3 zones. Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Enhanced Zone Bank Wi-Fi Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Keypad/Controls Lock Light/Flip TX Power Level Voice Announcement Locks or unlocks the keypad, programmable buttons, switches or rotary knobs. Press the button to toggle the display backlight on or off;

press and hold the button to reverse the content of the top display. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 32 English Channel the user has just assigned. Toggles voice mute on or off. Sets the volume set tone. Voice Mute Volume Set Tone Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button. Use the Menu Select and Navigation buttons. A B C D E Softkeys Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button 4Way Navigation Button Home Button Menu Select Buttons Note Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Use the Menu Select button to access the menu entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Home Button button returns you to the Home Pressing the

(default) screen. In most cases, this is the current button is mode. For selected radio features, the 33 English BCDEA also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 6 8

; @ _ 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

7 9

-

10

*

11

#

12

&

13

$

14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i A B C 34 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 D 2 E 3 F 4 5 6 7 G H J K M N I L O 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l P T U W X Q R S V Y Z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 35 English Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 6 8

; @ _ 5

!

4

?

3

, 2

. 7 9

-

10

*

11

#

12

&

13

$

14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) a d g j b e h k m n p t w q u x c f i l o r v y s z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 36 English Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 7 8

@ _ 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

6

;

9

-

10

*

11

#

12

&

13

$

14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 37 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 A D B E C F 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Not applicable Not applicable l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 38 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 61 for more information. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l on the side of the radio serves two The PTT button basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. 39 English A Identifying Status Indicators Status Icons The 130 x 130 pixel front liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The top two display rows contain color icons that indicate radio operating conditions. Selected icons are also shown on the first row of the 112 x 32 pixel top monochrome display screen of your radio. The following icons are for the front display screen unless indicated otherwise. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Top Display:

Top Display:

Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 40 English Top Display:

Top Display:

Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Battery For IMPRES battery operation only the icon shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. For all battery operation the icon blinks when the battery is low. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. Roaming The radio has roamed to and is currently registered to a foreign system. Top Display:

Top Display:

Top Display:

Direct On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication

(during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. Power Level L Radio is set at Low power. H Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. or Top Display:

or Top Display:

Top Display:

41 English Top Display:

Top Display:

Top Display:

or or Top Display:

or or View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady View mode Blinking Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Basic Zone Bank 1 A Radio is in Zone 1. B Radio is in Zone 2. C Radio is in Zone 3. Basic Zone Bank 2 D Radio is in Zone 4. E Radio is in Zone 5. F Radio is in Zone 6. Top Display:

,

, until or Top Display:

Enhanced Zone Bank A Contains Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3, B Contains Zone 4, Zone 5 and Zone 6, C Contains Zone 7, Zone 8 and Zone 9, until X Contains Zone 70, Zone 71 and Zone 72, Y Contains Zone 73, Zone 74 and Zone 75. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 42 English AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is available. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the radio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. 43 English Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Bluetooth On Bluetooth is on and ready for Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth is currently connected to the external Bluetooth device. Top Display:

Top Display:

The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represents the signal strength of the Wi-

Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. Status icons and menu options shown s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 44 English here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 100 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 45 English The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. Menu Option No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes Description/Function Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. TMS Menu Options Call Type Icons Menu Option Back Clr Del Edit Exit Description/Function Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes all messages. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 46 English Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. Incoming emergency call. LED Indicator The LED indicator your radio. shows the operational status of I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Solid red Blinking red Double blinking red Rapidly blinking red Solid yellow

(Conventional Only) Radio is transmitting. Radio is transmitting at low battery condition. Radio is in Emergency Mode. Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Channel is busy. 47 English A Blinking yellow Solid green Blinking green Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in Rapidly blinking green the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Note No LED indication when the radio receives a clear (non-secured) transmission in trunking Mode. LED indication can be preprogramed by qualified technician to be permanently disabled. Consult your dealer for further details if you want to disable it. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the backlight of the top display screen, and adds a color bar to the main display screen to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange Notification When Emergency Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 48 English Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates the Man Down Post-Alert timer. The radio initiates Fireground Evacuation alarm. The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 49 English Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. When radio initiates Man Down mode. Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Man Down Entry Time-Out Timer Timed Out After time out.

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Lack of Voice PTT Time out When the radio ends your call after it detected there is lack of voice for 60 seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your radio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users. The duration of this timer can be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. Out of Range Invalid Mode You Hear Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Long, Low-

Pitched Tone s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 50 English You Hear A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medium-

Pitched Tone Long, Medium-

Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-

Pitched Tones Tone Name Busy Heard When system is busy. When entering the emergency state. When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm /Call Entry Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back Keyfail Console Acknowledge When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 51 English You Hear Two Short, Medium-

Pitched Tones Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Gurgle Tone Name Received Individual Call Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Over-the-Air Programming request Heard When Call Alert or Private Call is received. When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When the radio receives an over-the-air programming request. Low-Battery Chirp When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS signal is lost or when GPS fails. Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for accepting its transmissions. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 52 English You Hear Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp Incremental-

Pitched Tone Decremental-

Pitched Tone A Group of Very High-

Pitched Tones Unique Low-

High Tone Unique High-

Low Tone Tone Name New Message Priority Status Heard When a new message is received. When a priority message is received. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t Bluetooth Paired Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth Unpaired Bluetooth Disconnected Man Down Continuous Tone Critical Man Down Continuous Tone Enhanced Zone Bank Up When Bluetooth accessory is paired with the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is connected to the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is unpaired from the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is disconnected from the radio. When radio is in Man Down mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. When radio is in Man Down Enhanced mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. When EZB Up button is pressed to scroll the Enhance Zone Bank up. Enhanced Zone Bank Down When EZB Down button is pressed to scroll the Enhance Zone Bank down. t u s I n d c a i t o r s 53 English Phone Call Displays and Alerts The following phone call displays and alerts appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear A Long Tone You See No phone Phone busy When You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. The phone system is busy. Press Notes Press Home screen. A Busy Tone Phone busy No acknowledge When a channel is not available. The call is not acknowledged. A High- Pitched Tone When you release the PTT button. to hang up. The radio returns to the to exit the phone mode and try your call later. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. to hang up. The radio returns to the Press Home screen. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. Note You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 54 English If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 55 English General Radio Operation Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. Note Any reference to Zone Select Switch can also be understood to refer to Zone Select via the Menu. The following methods are options on how to select a radio zone. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone via the preprogrammed Zone (3-

Position A/B/C) switch:

a) Move the preprogrammed Zone (3-Position A/B/C) switch to the position of the required zone. If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat this step. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 56 English b) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a zone via the radio menu Zone:

a) b) or to Zone and press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat this step. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the displayed zone. d) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a zone via the radio menu ZnUp or ZnDn:

or to ZnUp or ZnDn. a) b) Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below ZnUp or ZnDn until the required zone appears. Positions of ZnUp and ZnDn on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Read carefully before you press. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs. The following methods are options on how to select a radio channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel via the preprogrammed 16 Position Select Knob to the desired channel. a) Rotate the preprogrammed 16Position Select Knob to the desired channel. b) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel via the radio menu Chan:

or to Chan. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. or c) to the required channel or use the keypad to enter the channel number. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n If the channel number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat this step. d) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. e) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel via the radio menu Channel Up or Channel Down:

a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below to ChUp or ChDn. or ChUp or ChDn. Positions of ChUp and ChDn on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Read carefully before you press. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone and channel. Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of 57 English the channel. If the name matches, your radio prompts the first found matched channel name. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. or to CSrh and press the Menu Select button directly below CSrh. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below CSrh once the entry is done. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. The display shows Searching. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changed its transmission to the selected channel. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 58 English If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found. Repeat step 2 to search again; or press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:

Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) Note Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1 MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button You can save the frequent used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. 59 English If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio triggers for your attention with one of the following scenarios depending on the system your radio is configured:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 62 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the call received icon blinks. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. Press theCall Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 60 English If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 62 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen and the bar turns green.The display shows Phone Call and the call received icon blinks. G e n e r a l 1 Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. i R a d o O p e r a t i o n See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 64 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switch. The 16-Position Select Channel Knob. A preprogrammed One Touch Call button. The Contacts list (see Viewing Details of a Contact on page 80). 61 English Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Turn the 16-Position Select Channel Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 62 English 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or Use the keypad to enter the required ID. to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. The display shows Calling... <Number>. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert Page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 85 for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

63 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or Use the keypad to enter the required ID. to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. The display shows Calling... <Number>. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 64 English Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or Use the keypad to enter the required phone to the required phone number. number. 4 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. See Phone Call Displays and Alerts on page 54 for more information if your call is NOT answered. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to Dir and press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 65 English Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display when you monitor a channel via the preprogrammed Monitor button. The following methods are options on how to monitor a channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Monitoring a Channel with Volume Set button. a) Select the desired zone and channel. b) Press and hold the Volume Set button to hear the volume set tone. c) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. d) Release the Volume Set button. e) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. f) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). Monitoring a Channel with Monitor button. a) Press the preprogrammed Monitor button. b) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. c) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. d) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 66 English Monitoring a Channel via the selected zone channel. a) Select the desired zone and channel. b) Listen for a transmission. c) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. d) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. e) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). Monitoring Conventional Mode Your radio may be preprogrammed to receive Private-

Line (PL) calls. 1 Momentarily press the Monitor button to listen for activity. The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display. 2 Press and hold the Monitor button to set continuous monitor operation. The duration of the button press is programmable. 3 Press the Monitor button again, or the PTT button, to return to the original squelch setting. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 67 English Advanced Features Advanced Call Features Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Selective Call 1 Perform one of the following actions:

This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, the radio initiates for your attention with one of the following indication scenario:

You hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow to indicate the transmitting radio is still sending signal. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. The LED blinks solid green once to indicate the transmitting radio is pending to receive signal. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or Use the keypad to enter the required ID. to the required ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 117 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

to Preset for the preset or preprogrammed Talkgroup. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or Use the keypad to enter the number of the to the required Talkgroup. corresponding Talkgroup in the list. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. 69 English Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to Sts and press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received . The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a Gurgle tone and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows Reprgrm rqst and Please wait. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories:

to cancel and Select Enabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 71 English Select Disabled Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) Note Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store the frequent used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>.[2]

2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen.[2]

If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 2 # indicates number of the channel on the 16-Position Switch which are numbered from 1 to 16. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 4 5 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Select Chan screen. or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Channel updated. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from Channel Name The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 or to Channel Name then press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a blinking cursor on the Channel Name screen. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit the channel name. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Srch once the entry is done to initiate searching. 73 English You can cancel this operation at this step by pressing the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to Search Options screen. The display shows Searching.... Once found, the display shows Channel updated. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid entry. If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found. Repeat from step 4 or 5 to search again. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>+Blank. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context

(conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. or to scroll through the available IDs for the selected subscriber alias and proceed to step 6. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to select the call type. 5 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 75 English The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Adding a New Contact Entry 5 6 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [New Contact] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Edit name and a blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have entered the name. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. or to [Add Number] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Edit Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 7 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions per the information you need to add to current name:

to Type 1 and press the Menu Select or button directly below Edit. or to the required mode and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. Repeat Steps 6 through 7 to enter or edit the exisitng system IDs. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to add a new number. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Del and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Delete <Entry> confirm?. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Add to CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required Call List and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add to the Call List. or to Cncl to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. 77 English The display shows momentary Please wait before showing <Entry> added to Call List, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Removing a Contact from a Call List 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Rm frm CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Remove <Entry> frm Call List?. Editing an Entry Alias 1 2 3 4 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Edit and press the Menu Select or button directly below Sel. or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to remove the entry from the Call List, or No to cancel and return to the main display of Contacts. The display shows momentary Please wait before showing <Entry> removed from Call List, confirming the removal of the contact from the list. 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID Editing a Call Type 1 2 3 4 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Edit and press the Menu Select or button directly below Sel. or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 1 2 3 4 5 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Edit and press the Menu Select or button directly below Sel. or to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 79 English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Viewing Details of a Contact 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to view and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to View and press the Menu Select or button directly below Sel. The display shows all the numbers associated with the entry. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/ groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Please refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. or to view the members on the list. 3 Press to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. Editing the Scan List This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position. or to ScnL then press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. or to the entry you want to edit. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. to the desired channel. or Use the keypad to enter the desired channel name. Use the 16-Position Select knob to select the channel. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 82 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position. The display shows the programming mode icon and the first list member. 81 English or to the member you want to edit. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. Use the 16-Position Select knob to select another scan list member. 5 Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-

priority channels. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to toggle Scan On or Scan Off to initiate or stop scan. Turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan and press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Making a Dynamic Priority Change via the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button:

a) When the radio locks onto the channel designated as the new Priority-Two channel, press the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. 83 English This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Call Alert Paging When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Nuisance Delete button. or to Nuis and press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, or when you press the PTT button. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 62 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 62 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page The following methods are options on how to send a call alert page. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Note If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page via the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Sending a call alert page via the radio menu Page:

or to Page. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to view the required ID, to the required ID, or use the keypad to enter the required ID. or d) Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. 85 English If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu Call:

or to Call. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. or c) to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. d) To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes. To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No. The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen of Contacts. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Top (Orange) button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Each channel can only assigned one of the Emergency modes above. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel. Note To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. This timer is programmable from 0 6250 milliseconds by a qualified technician. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Man Down is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature on the condition the Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. See Man Down on page 93 for details. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Tactical/Non-

Revert Non-Tactical/

Revert for Conventional system Non-Tactical/

Revert for Trunking system The radio sends emergency alarm and/or make emergency call on the current selected channel. The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send alarm and/or make emergency call. The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency talkgroup to send alarm and/or make emergency call. Note The default timer of Emergency button press to activate Emergency is 50 milliseconds. This timer is programmable from 50 6200 milliseconds by a qualified technician. Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short medium-

pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. The radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate that the selected channel does not 87 English support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. When you receive the dispatchers acknowledgment, the display shows Ack received. Four tones sound, the alarm ends, and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows No acknowledge. The alarm ends when the timer expires and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short medium-

pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgement. The display shows No acknowledge. You press the PTT button while in the Emergency Alarm mode. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

You press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode. Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. Change of Channels during Emergency For ALL Emergency transmissions, when changing channels:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 89 English If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is not preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. Emergency Keep-Alive Feature This feature, when enabled, prevents the radio from being turned off via the On/Off Control Knob when the radio is in the Emergency state. Note The radio only exits the Emergency state using one of the ways mentioned in the previous sections. See Sending an Emergency Alarm on page 87, Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) on page 88, Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call on page 88, or Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm on page 89. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English Fireground (Conventional Only) Incident Management Software The portable Fireground Communications System is designed for deployment at an incident scene. It consists of five central components:

Your APX portable radios Command Terminal Radio Frequency (RF) Modem DVRS (Optional) These components provide on-scene and inbuilding radio coverage, and enhanced personnel accountability and monitoring. The radio helps to indicate your presence on the scene if it is in the range of the Incident Commander command terminal. Each Fireground Communication System radio automatically reports your radio ID on the commander mobile command terminal. Your name, riding position and sector are all can be configured to be seen at the Commanders command terminal. If you have a critical situation, you can press the Emergency button which activates an alarm on the Incident Management Software at the command terminal. The Fireground signals transmission is always exchanging data between your radio and the RF Modem and command terminal. The status of your radio includes:

Powering up or down the radio Automatic response to Polling Response to Evacuation commands Pressing the PTT button to make voice transmission Sending an Emergency Alarm and Call Entering Fireground Zone Channel 1 Upon powering up, perform one of the following actions:

If the Fireground Zone Channel is set as default, you hear gurgle tone and the home screen. You are in Fireground zone channel. If the Fireground Zone Channel is set as default, but you hear a short, low-pitched tone, the display shows Reg failed to indicate that the command terminal does not respond to Fireground Zone Channel. Get a qualified technician for assistance. If your home channel is not Fireground Zone Channel, toggle or change the radio zone channel to Fireground Zone Channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press and hold the preprogrammed Volume Set button to hear the volume set tone. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. Release the Volume Set button. At the desired Fireground zone and channel, press the preprogrammed Monitor button and listen for activity. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. If your radio is working in Fireground Zone Channel, proceed to next step. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red while transmitting. Talk into the microphone clearly if needed. 5 Release the PTT button to receive. 91 English You hear a Transmit End Tone. Responding to Evacuation Indicator When Incident Commander triggers Evacuation signal from his command terminal, the RF Modem updates everyone in the Fireground Communication System with the order to evacuate the incident site. Your radio sounds the Evacuation Tone at the profile maximum alert tone volume level. The display shows EVACUATE. Perform one of the following actions:

Move the Volume Control Knob to adjust the volume of the Evacuation Tone from full volume. Perform any action on the radio other than volume adjustments to cancel the evacuation indications and update the command terminal. If preprogrammed with Manual Acknowledgement of Evacuation Command, pressing the PTT button shall cancel the indications and acknowledge the command terminal. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Tactical Public Safety (TPS) (Conventional Only) TPS enabled the user of a group to identify a transmission starts and ends clearly by displaying the caller name or ID on the radio display. Using TPS Normal Transmission At TPS Zone Channel, perform one of the following actions:

Press PTT button to transmit. Talk clearly into the microphone. Release PTT button to listen. Receive and listen to call, the radio displays the callers name or ID. Using TPS Emergency Transmission The following are two important alert tones designed for this feature. Emergency Beacon During Emergency if the TPS radio user pushes the Emergency button, the radio sounds a Beacon at the maximum volume of the radio at radios internal speaker and it is not adjustable. This beacon goes to Emergency Call De-Key Sidetone silent when user presses the PTT button for voice transmission. The radio sounds an alert tone to remind radio user that the Emergency Mode is still active after user releases the PTT button for an Emergency call transmission. The volume of loudness depends on the maximum tone at your radio profile. 1 Press the Emergency button to enter Emergency Mode. You hear Emergency Beacon. 2 Press PTT button to make Emergency Call. 3 Release to listen. You hear Emergency Call De-Key Sidetone. After a short pause, you hear Emergency Beacon. 4 Long press Emergency button to exit Emergency mode and cancel Emergency Beacon. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Man Down Man Down condition is determined based upon the radio tilt angle or a combination of radio tilt angle and the lack of radio motion. Man Down feature is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature if Emergency has been programmed in your radio. Note This feature could be preprogrammed for all channels that support Emergency feature or could be preprogrammed specifically to a zone and channel which has Emergency feature. Consult your agent or qualified technician for more details. Your radio automatically activates Emergency Alarm or Call when the radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and radio motion below the motion sensitivity level, depending upon how the radio is programmed. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. 93 English Note It is recommended that an Emergency button is preprogrammed in order to allow the user to exit the emergency condition. The Man Down feature provides a Clear function to the user. After a Man Down condition has been detected, the user can press a preprogrammed Clear button or preprogrammed Menu Select button to cancel the Man Down condition. The radio remains in the Man Down state without triggering an emergency condition until the radio is moved out of the Man Down state, at which point Man Down functionality resumes. The Man Down feature has three phases:

1 The radio senses the Man Down condition and Pre-Alert Timer is initiated. 2 Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Pre-Alert Timer field. At the end of this time, the radio alerts the user on the Man Down status with an audible alert tone and Man-Down text on the screen. The Post-Alert Timer also initiates at this point. 3 Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. Once the timer expires, the Emergency alarm is transmitted. The Man Down Clear function is used in this phase to cancel the Man Down condition. The following scenarios affect the timers:

Pressing the PTT button suspends the Man Down timers; releasing the PTT button re-initiates the Pre-Alert Timer. Pressing other buttons on the radio does not impact these timers. Repositioning the radio exits the Man Down feature, which stops and resets the timers. Pressing a preprogrammed Clear button or pressing a Menu Select button preprogrammed for Clear stops and resets the timers. The timers do not restart until the radio is repositioned. Note Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. For details on operating the Emergency alerts, please see Emergency Operation on page 86. If the radio is preprogrammed to horizontal only, it must be worn in a vertical position otherwise the Man Down alert may be inadvertently triggered. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s When the radio is programmed with Man Down feature, special care is required when charging the radio with a wall mounted charger. See Proper Ways to Handle the Radio on page 178 for details. Pre-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time that a Man Down condition must be present before the radio-user is warned of the Man Down condition. When the radio detects that it has returned to the vertical position or when the radio detects motion, the Pre-Alert timer stops and is reset. The Pre-Alert timer reinitiates when the radio detects it is in the horizontal position or motionless again. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Man Down condition before the Emergency alarm is transmitted. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio alerts the user with an audible tone and displays the Man-Down text. See Exiting Man Down Feature on page 96 to exit Man Down feature. Radio Alerts When Man Down Feature is Triggered The Man Down alert tone volume is directly related to the radio speaker volume. Ensure that the radio speaker volume is loud enough so that the user does not miss the Post-Alert tone. Note If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio including the Man Down tones. Triggering Emergency When the user does not clear the Man Down condition and the Post-Alert Timer comes to an end, Emergency Alarm or call is triggered. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. The radio also sends ID number and GPS coordinates to dispatcher if these features are enabled. User can exit Emergency following the Emergency procedure. See Emergency Operation on page 86 for details. 95 English Note At this point the Man Down features is complete. Use normal Emergency procedures to cancel Emergency transmissions. Radio Alerts When Man Down Enhanced is Triggered Note This feature is to be preprogrammed specifically to a zone and channel which supports Emergency feature. The volume and repetition duration of Man Down Enhanced alert tone could be customized and preprogrammed to suite the required situation. Consult your agent or qualified technician for more details. When the radio initiates Man Down Enhanced, you hear the Critical Man Down Continuous alert tone from the radio speaker. The volume of this tone is set to the louder of the preprogrammed minimum level or the current radio speaker level. This acts as a beacon to find the radio. Note If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the alert tone can be heard from the radio speaker. Once the alert tone is active, changing to another channel with different setup triggers a different response from the radio as described next. The alert tone is inhibited when you change to a channel without Emergency feature. The alert tone is inhibited when you change to a channel with Emergency but no Man Down feature. The current alert tone is inhibited and is replaced with a different alert tone when you change to a channel with Emergency and different Man Down configuration. The alert tone continues when you change to a channel with Emergency and similar Man Down configuration. Exiting Man Down Feature If you are not in a real Man Down situation, you should exit the Man Down feature and prevent t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English emergency from going off with the following operation. 1 Turn the radio on and place in the vertical position, for at least 5 seconds. Perform one of the following actions:

Repositioning the radio or shaking the radio

(when motion sensitivity is enabled). Press the preprogrammed Man Down Clear button to exit. Press the Menu Select button below Clr to exit. Re-Initiating Man Down After exiting the Emergency Operation when the radio is still in Man Down condition (tilted achieving threshold angle or motionless), user must first exit Man Down condition to then reinitiate the Man Down feature. Return the radio to the vertical position or shake the radio (when motion sensitivity is enabled). Testing the Man Down Feature Enable the Emergency feature with Silent Alarm disabled, but not in Surveillance Mode before running this test on the radio. 2 Lay the radio down in the horizontal position. 3 Wait for alert tone. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The radio alerts with audible tone and displays Man-Down. If no tone is heard, make sure that the Man Down feature is enabled on your radio. If Man Down feature was not enabled, please enable it and repeat 1 to 3. If the Man Down feature is enabled and no tone is heard, send the radio to a qualified technician. Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 97 English The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode via 16-

Position Select knob:

a) Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode via the radio menu:

a) or to Chan. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. The display shows the current channel name. c) or to the required channel or mode. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the zone and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the zone and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. d) Press Sel to confirm the displayed channel. User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Note A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. Logging In as a User 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed User Login button. or to User and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. If the ID is invalid, the display shows momentary Invalid ID. 3 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. One of the following scenarios occurs:

99 English If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. Note To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. Logging Out When you have logged in or you are using Offline mode, you can log out. Note Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. One of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows Clear private data?. Proceed to the next step. If the Delete Messages On Session End feature is enabled, the radio clears the private data and returns to User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. Select No to keep your private data. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. A query (ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution). Note Query is only supported within ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution. See Two-

Factor Authentication on page 112 and ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution on page 111 for details. Inbox The main menu consists of the following options:

Compose Drafts Sent Note See Status Icons on page 40 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 46 for more information on each menu option. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 or to TMS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. 101 English Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap).

, pressing 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. or to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 4 102 English 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. Note You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. You can also select the Save to Drafts option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 109 for more information. To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message or Query has a maximum length of 50 characters. You can select the required text from the Quick Text or Query. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

4 5 or to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 103 English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 7 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Note You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. Note The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message is important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 or to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. 105 English The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message is important. or to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status icon. or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Receiving a Text Message Note When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. The following methods are options on how to receive a text message. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message via the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

a) When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Receiving a text message via the radio menu:

a) When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Sel. or Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Sel. or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 2 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del, or Back to access the option. 107 English Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 44 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message Note The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English or to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. 6 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Note Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 or to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Sel. The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 4 or to the required text message and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. 109 English or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sel. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 44 for more information. 2 3 t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English 2 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Note Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Deleting a Text Message 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, scroll through the messages. or to 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the current message. Deleting All Text Messages 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Messaging feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 or to Inbox or Sent then press the Menu Select button below Clr to select all messages in the selected folder. The display shows Del All?. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS feature screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution The ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your data-enabled Motorola two-way radios. Federal mandate requires Two-Factor Authentication when querying Federal and State databases. With this advance messaging solution you have the ability enable Two-Factor Authentication. With Query and Two-Factor Authentication, you can use a secure system logon to initiate and receive key information on people, vehicles and properties when doing the regular security patrol. You can access to local or external databases such as the National Crime Information Center (NCIC), for "Hot Hits" on 111 English priors and warrants. Query and Two-Factor Authentication has Criminal Justice Information Services (CJIS) security compliance for queries. With this Advanced Messaging Solution, ARS functionality splits between two protocols:

ARS for Device Registration New User Authentication for User Login TMS functionality splits between two protocols:

TMS for messaging New Service Advertisement for service availabilities The radio with Two-Factor capabilities are backward compatible with the existing device registration system and TMS servers. System Setup for ASTRO Advanced Messaging Solution Your user name, unit ID and password all need to be provisioned in PremierOne. Your user account in PremierOne needs to be linked to an RSA account specifying a token to be used with the Two-Factor passcode. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English The radios caches the user name, unit ID and or Single Factor password in the codeplug, this allows the radio to automatically log in to use Single Factor authentication upon power up or mode change. The Two-Factor passcode is not stored in the codeplug. You can upgrade the Single Factor session to a Two-

Factor session by entering the Two-Factor passcode only. After an interruption (for example mode change, DSR switch over, power loss), the radio is capable of restoring the active session in its current state as long as the session is active in the server. Note Power loss and power down are different activities, power down occurs when the user intentionally powers off the radio, power loss is when the battery dies or is removed from the unit. Two-Factor Authentication Two-Factor Authentication is an extension of existing ARS and TMS operation. This feature allows you to authenticate yourself with a username, unit ID, password and passcode. The purpose of this feature is to allow the sender of a text message to address a specific user of the radio, so the message is delivered to the user, not to the radio which may have any user using it at the time. Secondly, this feature supports query authentication requirements so the query service knows which user originated a query. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. Logging in via the Two-Factor Authentication 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed User Login button. or to User, and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type or edit a username. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined username. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined username. If the selected predefined username has more than the maximum allowed characters, or an invalid character in it, the display shows momentary Invalid ID. 3 For radio enabled with Unit ID, perform one of the following actions:

or to [UnitID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type or edit a Unit ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 113 English or to scroll through the list of predefined Unit IDs. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined Unit ID. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined Unit IDs at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined Unit ID. If the selected predefined Unit ID has more than the maximum allowed characters, or an invalid character in it, the display shows momentary Invalid UnitID. 4 Enter your password when you see a blinking cursor. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn or Ok. If only one-factor is enabled, the display shows 1F logged at the status. The login operation is complete. If login fails, the display shows momentary Login failed. The display returns to User Login screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English 6 For radio enabled with two-factor login, enter your passcode when you see a blinking cursor. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. The display shows In progress. If the login fails, the display shows momentary 2F pscd failed. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pscd to re-enter passcode. If successful, the display shows User Login screen with 2F logged in status to indicate Two-Factor Authentication complete. Logging out of Two-Factor Authentication Note Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. Radio which is successfully logged in to the secured system receives advertisement from the server that the access to the data for query is enabled. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Clear private data?. If the Delete Messages On Session End feature is enabled, the display shows momentary Private data cleared. 2 Select Yes to clear all your private data or select No to keep your private data. If you select Yes, the display shows momentary Private data cleared. Sending a Query This feature is available for radio users who have successfully logged in with the Two-Factor Authentication. Query is a special form of Quick Text marked with a flag that is replied or dispatched in normal TMS message. The query template needs to be configured in the quick test list of the CPS. You can choose from the quick text list, including queries if present. You shall receive a service advertisement message to indicate the Query is available after you have successfully logged in the radio with a Two-Factor Authentication. Note The query server must be selected as the destination so that it can receive the query message and respond the query with text message. The query server must be an entry in the data user list in the CPS. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed TMS Query button and proceed to Step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 115 English 4 5 or to Query and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 6 Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 8 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. Note The server responds to your query with the required report in text messages. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Receiving a Query You shall receive the information you have requested in TMS format. When you receive a query, you hear a unique, high-

pitched chirp and the display shows the message icon flagged with Priority. The display shows momentary New msg. To access the Inbox, press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button or press the Menu Select button directly below TMS. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Selecting Secure Transmissions Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the secure position. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation, when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio does not transmit until you set the Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. If the Ignore Secure/Clear Switch when Strapped programming option is enabled, the radio transmits without displaying any messages in the strapped mode of operation, regardless of the Secure/Clear switch setting. This option must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The Secure/Clear switch only applies when the radio is transmitting. Selecting Clear Transmissions Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. 117 English Note If the selected channel is preprogrammed for secure-only operation, when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Secure TX only. The radio does not transmit until you set the Secure/ Clear switch to the secure position. You can request to configure the radio to ignore the clear voice or insecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. If the Ignore Secure/Clear Switch when Strapped programming option is enabled, the radio transmits without displaying any messages in the strapped mode of operation, regardless of the Secure/Clear switch setting. This option must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The Secure/Clear switch only applies when the radio is transmitting. Managing Encryption Loading an Encryption Key Note Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading, and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. 2 Select the required keys and press the Menu Select button directly below LOAD on the KVL. This loads the encryption keys into your radio. When the key has been loaded successfully, one of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear the radio sounds a short tone for single-

key radios. You hear the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey Trunked Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Note When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. 119 English When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 2 or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Note Press

, the PTT button, or the Exit menu selection, or turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. The following methods are options on how to erase the selected encryption keys. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Erasing the selected encryption keys via the radio menu:

a) or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. The display shows the available key erase options. d) or to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. e) Select Erase all keys? or Erase single key? by pressing the Menu Select button below Yes to erase the encryption key(s) in the radio. You can return to the previous screen by pressing the Menu Select button below No. Erasing the single key in radios with the single-key option and erasing all keys in radios with the multikey option via the preprogrammed Top Side

(Select) button and Top (Orange) button:

a) Press and hold the Top Side (Select) button. b) While holding Top Side (Select) button down, press the Top (Orange) button. The display shows Please wait. When all the encryption keys have been erased, the display shows All keys erased. Note Do not press the Top (Orange) button before pressing the Top Side (Select) button, unless you are in an emergency situation as this sends an emergency alarm. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) is loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. 121 English 1 or to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. Note The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-

the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key

(UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all of the encryption keys is erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio could not be over the air rekeyed. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the Expander background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Random FM Noise Canceller

(Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Security Radio Lock This feature changes your radio to a more robust security system that protects the use of the secure encryption keys. If this feature is enabled in your radio by a qualified radio technician, when you turn the radio on, the display shows Radio locked. Unlocking Your Radio 1 Enter your numeric password. Secure-equipped radios 6 to 8 characters. 123 English Clear radios 0 to 8 characters. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to enter the code. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to exit the feature. If the password is correct, the radio unlocks. If the password is incorrect, the display show Incorrect password and the radio remains locked. If you enter three incorrect passwords in a row, the display shows Deadlock. Turn the radio off and then on, and begin again at Step 1. Important For Secure Radios Only After a total of 17 consecutive incorrect passwords

(turning the radio off and on does not reset this number), the radio erases all of its encryption keys and shows Deadlock. See a qualified radio technician. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English If you forget the password, enter ******** to erase all keys and revert the password in the radio back to the default password of 01234567. Changing Your Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Unlock Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 10. Note If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Tactical Inh Encode Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 7 Enter the new password. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 10. Note If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature

(Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. 1 or to Logf. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logf. 125 English One of the following results occur.:

The display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. Radio Stun and Kill Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-activate the stunned radio. Using Radio Stun 1 or to Stun. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Stun. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. The display shows radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or Press the Menu Select button directly below to the required ID. LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Decrypt failed. If the receiving radio is powered off, your radio display shows No Acknowledgement. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. Note To un-stun a radio, follow the procedure in Unlocking Your Radio on page 123. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Radio Kill 5 Perform one of the following actions:

This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. The killed radio can only be recovered from KILL with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. 1 or to Kill. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kill. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. The display shows radio Contact IDs. or Press the Menu Select button directly below to the required ID. LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Decrypt failed. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Acknowledgement. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. 127 English Press and hold the Top Side button then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System The Global Navigation System (GNSS) in the radio integrated the information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) and Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio. The geographical location is expressed as latitude and longitude or Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) format per request from customers. Note This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. Once GPS is enabled, the radio displays the GPS icon on the screen. The dispatcher can always request the system to determine the real-time location coordinates of the radio. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location coordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 129 English waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 130 English Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) Coordinates This feature can only be enabled through CPS configuration. When the MGRS coordinate is enabled, all location coordinates are displayed in MGRS format, including the editable locations in GPS. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature Note An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature to on or follow the following procedure to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To obtain a location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below On . Press the Menu Select button directly below to Turn On GPS and press the Optn. Menu Select button directly below Sel. or The front display shows the MGRS or latitude/

longitude location, time, and date of the last successful location fix. 4 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current location along with the UTC (Zulu) time and date that the location fix was obtained. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the radio fails to get a location fix, the display shows No service and returns to the previous display. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to 5. or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to 5. A blinking cursor appears in the screen. 131 English 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows Current loc saved as

<Waypoint name>. The display shows Current loc saved as

[Home]. The display shows Current loc saved as

[Destination]. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the list. to select a waypoint to view the or or location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To view the MGRS or latitude/longitude location, time and date of the selected waypoint, View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press preprogrammed GPS button.

, the PTT button, or the Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint Note Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination can be edited by the user. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 7 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [Home] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 133 English or to [Destination] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The first number blinks. 4 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press to move to the next number/

coordinates. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [Home] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [Destination] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. or Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows Delete <Waypoint name>

Confirm?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <Waypoint name>deleted . Deleting All Saved Waypoints A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Delete All and press the Menu or Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Delete All saved waypnts Confirm?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Note You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 135 English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Trunking System Controls Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-

pitched tone and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue, in Failsoft, to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Rotate the Mode Knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. Your radio remains in this out-of-

range condition until it locks onto a control channel, it locks onto a failsoft channel, or it is turned off. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/

channel combination and Site trunking. Note When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/

Unlock button. Follow the following procedure to lock and unlock a site via the radio menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site locked. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. 137 English Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. The display shows momentary the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Changing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Press and hold down the Menu Select button Displ/Srch button. directly below RSSI. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning site. 138 English When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth-

This feature allows your radio to extend its functionality by connecting to external proprietary Motorola accessories. Note It is recommended to use Motorola proprietary Mission Critical Wireless (MCW) devices with APX radios during Mission Critical operations as other Bluetooth devices may or may not meet the mission critical standard. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. The use of this feature requires the "Full Feature" expansion board together with the Bluetooth Software. The default setting for Bluetooth-enabled radio is Bluetooth on. See Turning Off the Bluetooth on page 139 to turn off the Bluetooth. Currently your radio supports the following Bluetooth devices or profiles. Headset (HSP) Dial Up Networking (DUN) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Serial Port (SPP) Turning On Bluetooth The following methods are options on how to turn on the Bluetooth. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turning on the Bluetooth via the radio menu BT:

or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. b) or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows Status On, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Turning on the Bluetooth via the preprogrammed button:

a) Press the preprogrammed button to turn on the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth on, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. Turning Off the Bluetooth The following methods are options on how to turn off the Bluetooth. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turning off the Bluetooth via the radio menu BT:

or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. b) or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. 139 English The display shows Status Off, and disappears. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth via the preprogrammed button:

a) Press the preprogrammed button to turn off the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth off and disappears. Re-Pair Timer There are two options for configuring the Bluetooth pairing type of the radio. The type defines the duration the radio and the accessory retain the pairing information. Immediate (For MCW accessories only.) When the radio and/or device is turned off after pairing, the keys are lost. Due to this, when your radio and your device are turned on again, they are unable to re-

connect. The user must re-pair the t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 140 English Infinite Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate

(For MCW Accessories only) devices to re-establish a new set of pairing keys. See Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing

(LF-MPP) Feature on page 142 and Standard Pairing Feature on page 144.

(For all Bluetooth devices.) When the radio and/or device are turned off after pairing, keys are not lost. When the radio and the device are turned on again, they can resume the Bluetooth connection without user intervention. Re-Pair Timer Scenarios When the radio is powered off, pairing key is lost immediately, and accessory attempts to pair again. If pairing is unsuccessful within the Drop Timer value, the accessory automatically powers off. When the accessory is powered off, all keys are lost immediately, Re-Pair Timer Scenarios Re-Pair Timer Options and the user must re-pair the devices. When the device loses Bluetooth connection, the device will attempt to re-establish Bluetooth Connection within the Drop Timer value. When the radio is powered off, the accessory attempts to re-

establish the Bluetooth Connection for a period of time depending upon the Drop Timer value. If the device fails to reconnect within the period, the accessory then powers off. Infinite (For all Bluetooth devices) Bluetooth Drop Timer The Bluetooth Drop Timer has two different settings and functions, depending upon the selection of the Re-Pair Timer. Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate

(For MCW Accessories only) Infinite (For all Bluetooth devices) Description 0 15 minutes programmable buffer time to re-establish the Bluetooth Connection when the Bluetooth signal is out of range. If either device powers off, the pairing keys are immediately cleared from both devices and the devices must re-pair. This Timer only applies to the accessory. The programmable timer choices are: 0 15 minutes, 2 hours, 4 hours or 8 hours. Do note there are exceptions for Operation Critical Wireless (OCW) headset and PTT which are preprogrammed to 8 hours. This timer is a "stay alive" timer where the accessory remains on without the device reconnecting before powering off. The radio remains on until the user powers A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 141 English Re-Pair Timer Options Description off the radio. The radio and accessory remains paired indefinitely. Once the device re-

connect, the timer is reset. The radio could not control the Drop Timer of Personal Area Networking (PAN), Dial-Up Networking

(DUN), Commercial Off- The-Shelf (COTS) and data services. It depends on the specifications of these external devices. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information about these timers. To establish the Bluetooth Connection, see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-

MPP) Feature on page 142 or Standard Pairing Feature on page 144 . Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing

(LF-MPP) Feature Ensure that Bluetooth feature of your radio is on and the Bluetooth tones are enabled. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 142 English Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The range of Bluetooth operation when using a MCW accessory is 10 meters line-of-sight communication. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the signal transmitter (your radio) and the location of the receiver (your device or accessory). Obstacles that can cause an obstruction in the line-of-

sight include trees, buildings, mountains, cars and etc. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your accessory to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position the accessory and radio closer to each other (within the 10 meter defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Note Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk Time power consumption, not the Standby Time consumption. Turn on the accessory. Then, place it close to the radio aligning the Bluetooth Pairing Location (a blue dot) on the radio to the Bluetooth Pairing Location (a blue dot) on the accessory. If the pairing process is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The radio begins to connect to the device. If the pairing process fails, you hear a short, low-

pitched tone. The display shows Bluetooth pairing failed. Repeat this step. The radio tries to establish connection with the device once paired. Note If the connection fails within 6 seconds, you hear a decremental-pitched tone to indicate that the device is unpaired. The display shows

<Device Type> unpaired. Repeat this step to re-initiate the pairing process. If the connection is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> connected and the Bluetooth icon turns from to

. If the radio has the pairing record of the device and the connection fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> connect failed. Radio Indications of Lost Bluetooth Connection A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The radio shows connection. Below is the scenario and radio indications when the connection is interrupted. when the device has a Bluetooth starts blinking for up to 10 seconds. You hear The a decremental-pitched tone. The display shows

<Device Type> alternating with disconnected. If the Bluetooth device successfully re-connects before the Bluetooth 10 second Re-Connection Timer expires, the display shows momentary <Device Type> connected, and Bluetooth device fails to re-connect within 10 stops blinking, or if the seconds, the blinking is replaced by a persistent

. 143 English Standard Pairing Feature Note Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk time power consumption, not the Standby time consumption. The Bluetooth Standard Pairing feature enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to search for other Bluetooth enabled and discoverable device. Once the device is discovered, you can initiate your radio to send a pairing request to pair with the device. This feature also enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to be visible to another Bluetooth enabled device and receive request to pair from other device. The Standard Pairing feature supports pairing Authentication Personal Pairing Number or PIN which ensure your radio recognizes the correct device to pair. The PIN must be exchanged with the radio or t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 144 English the device before the pairing completes. Your radio prompts for the Authentication PIN when needed. Refer to your devices manual for details about the Bluetooth Authentication PIN of your device if needed. Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device Ensure the Bluetooth on your device is turned on and is set to Discoverable in order to enable your radio to detect your device in Bluetooth. Bluetooth Search in Bluetooth Standard Pairing method is used to scan for other Bluetooth devices nearby. It is set to off by default. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button . or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. and press the Menu Select button directly below On. to Search Devices or If successful, the display shows Searching for BT devices followed by the names of Bluetooth devices found, if any. When the search timer expires, Available Dev screen shows a list of Bluetooth devices found. To stop the search before the search timer expires, press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button or the Menu Select button below Stop. If the feature fails to initiate, the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The screen shows BT Search failed. Press the Menu Select button below Back to return to Bluetooth feature screen, or press Exit to return to Home screen. or the Menu Select button below 2 or to the device name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the device. The radio starts pairing to the device. To continue with Bluetooth pairing, see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-MPP) Feature on page 142. Turning On Bluetooth Visibility Turning Bluetooth visibility to on enables other Bluetooth devices to search for your radio. The visibility of the Bluetooth is set to off by default. The following methods are options on how to turn on Bluetooth visibility. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turn on Bluetooth visibility via radio menu BT:

or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s b) or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The status changes to Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn on Bluetooth visibility. Turn on Bluetooth visibility via the preprogrammed button. a) Press the preprogrammed button to enable the Bluetooth visibility feature. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. 145 English When the timer expires, the display shows momentary Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn on Bluetooth visibility. Note Press the preprogrammed button to toggle the Bluetooth visibility on or off. Receiving Pairing Request from other Devices When your radio receives a pairing request from other device, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair request. Press the Menu Select button below Ok to accept or Cncl to refuse pairing request. Turning Off Bluetooth Visibility Ensure that Bluetooth Visibility is turned on. The following methods are options on how to turn off Bluetooth visibility. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turn off Bluetooth visibility via radio menu BT:

t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 146 English a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Visibility Off. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn off Bluetooth visibility. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. To disable the Bluetooth visibility, press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visibility Off. Visibility mode is disabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn off Bluetooth visibility. PIN Authentication in Pairing For the security of your radio, Bluetooth Pairing PIN feature is designed to enable your radio to verify the correct device to pair before initiating the pairing. Authentic PIN is used for the verification. Note The compare PIN authentication method is only applicable for Bluetooth version 2.1 and above. Pairing the Authentication PIN when Receiving a Pairing Request 1 When the radio display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair request, perform one of the following actions:

To accept, press the Menu Select button below Ok. To reject, press the Menu Select button below Cncl Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. When the pairing timer expires, the display shows

<Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. If you choose to accept the pairing process, the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If you choose to reject the pairing process, the display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions when the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX.:

Press the Menu Select button below Ok if the PIN is correct. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the Menu Select button below Cncl to reject if the PIN number is incorrect. The display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. When the PIN authentication timer expires, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair canceled and return to Home screen. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress...., <Device Friendly Name>

paired followed by <Device Friendly Name>connected. 147 English If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

pair failed (if the pairing timer expires). The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

connect failed (if the connecting timer expires). If the PIN is correct but the profiles are not supported, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Home screen. Pairing the Authentication PIN with the Generated Numeric PIN Follow the procedure inSearching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device on page 144 to search for available Bluetooth devices. Start pairing with the Authentication PIN by following the steps described next. 1 or to the required device. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to initiate pairing. Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 148 English If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress... followed by a randomly generated numeric PIN, Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If unsuccessful, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Available Dev screen. 2 Press Ok to continue pairing the radio and the device. The pairing process can be canceled by pressing the Menu Select button below Cncl. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress,<Device Friendly Name> paired, Connecting in progress... followed by

<Device Friendly Name>connected. The display returns to the Bluetooth feature screen. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

pair failed (if the PIN numbers are different).

<Device Friendly Name> connect failed

(if the connection fails). The display returns to Available Dev screen. Pairing the Authentication PIN by Manually Keying in the Same PIN Follow the procedure in Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device on page 144 to search for available Bluetooth devices. Start pairing with the Authentication PIN by following the steps described next. 1 or to the required device. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to initiate pairing. Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress... followed by a request for PIN number. A blinking cursor appears below the Enter PIN:. If unsuccessful, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Available Dev screen. 2 Use the keypad to enter the PIN. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete. 3 Press Ok to continue pairing the radio and the device. Enter the same PIN number on the device. The pairing process can be canceled by pressing the Menu Select button below Cncl. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress,<Device Friendly Name> paired, Connecting in progress... followed by

<Device Friendly Name>connected. The display returns to the Bluetooth feature screen. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

PIN auth fail (if the PIN numbers are different).

<Device Friendly Name> connect failed

(if the connection fails). The display returns to Available Dev screen. 149 English Turning On the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset) Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio) The following methods are options on how to turn on the Bluetooth audio. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. The following methods are options on how to turn off the Bluetooth Audio. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning on the Bluetooth audio via radio menu BT:

Turning off the Bluetooth audio via radio menu BT:

a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows On. a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Off. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning on the Bluetooth audio via the preprogrammed button:

a) To route the audio routing from the radio to the headset, short press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Headset on. Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth audio via the preprogrammed button:

a) To route the audio routing from the headset to the radio, press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Speaker on. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 150 English Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device Ensure that the Bluetooth audio device is connected to the radio. Your radio can only control the volume of MCW and OCW Bluetooth enabled audio device. If the radio is paired with other Bluetooth enabled audio device, its volume is independent from the APX radio. In this case, the volume is only adjustable on the device. Adjust volume up/down on the Bluetooth audio device. The radio display shows Volume XX, and you hear a short, medium-pitched tone. Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information 1 2 or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Devices. Once the display highlights the Devices, the display shows XX connected alternates with XX paired. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 If there are devices being paired or connected, along the list of <Device Friendly Name>

or to see the status of each device. If there are no active Bluetooth devices being paired or connected, the display shows No devices. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

To clear the device from the list, to the required device, press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s To exit from this function, press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen without deleting the device name. If Clr is selected, the display shows <Device Friendly Name> clear?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes or No to proceed delete the device or to exit this function and return to previous screen.. If the device is deleted successfully, the display shows <Devlice Friendly Name> cleared to indicate clearing is successful. 151 English If the device is not deleted successfully, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Devlice Friendly Name> clear failed. The display returns to previous screen. Note If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information The following methods are options on how to clear all Bluetooth devices information. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Clearing all Bluetooth devices information via the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button:

a) Long press the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 152 English If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. Clearing all Bluetooth devices information via the radio menu Clr:

a) or to Devices and press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices?. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to proceed. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. Note If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) Editing the Bluetooth Friendly Name Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Friendly name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears in the Friendly Name screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the text. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to save the new Friendly Name and return to the Bluetooth feature screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Bluetooth feature screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Over-the-Air Programming (POP 25, ASTRO 25, ASTRO Conventional and Wi-Fi) This feature enables configuration data and firmware to be upgraded to your radio over-the-air. Full use of the radio is retained during the data transfer without interrupting communication. For ASTRO 25 and ASTRO Conventional, the upgrade pauses to give priorities to voice call, and continues after the voice call ended. For Wi-Fi, the upgrade process runs concurrently with voice calls. Once a configuration upgrade is downloaded to your radio, you can install new changes immediately or delay changes to be installed on the radio when it is being powered up. Your radio can also be configured to allow you to accept or reject an upgrade. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 153 English Responding to the Notification of Upgrade 1 The display shows Upgrade? and two short, medium- pitched tones sounds every 30 seconds until the user makes a choice of accepting, delaying, or rejecting the request 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Acpt to accept the request to upgrade immediately. Press the Menu Select button below Dlay to delay the request to upgrade. Press the Menu Select button below Rej to reject the request to upgrade. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose to accept, the display shows Programming Dont power off to indicate the upgrade is about to begin. The radio resets to install the upgrade. In the case of configuration data upgrade, this process only takes a few seconds. In the case of firmware upgrade, the installation takes several minutes. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 154 English Note The radio cannot be used while the upgrade is being installed. Therefore, make sure to only accept the upgrade at a convenient time when immediate radio use is not required. If you choose to delay, a configuration data upgrade is installed automatically at the next power up. However, in the case of a firmware upgrade, the radio prompts Upgrade? again at the next power up. If you choose to reject, the display shows Upg Aborted. The radio continues to function with the current configuration until it gets reprogrammed. Note If your radio has problems upgrading over-the-

air, consult a qualified technician for details. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone or channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum duration of all different voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your agent if Voice Announcement is available for the feature you need. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

High Enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button (which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note Pressing this preprogrammed playback button enables the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel remaining within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a 155 English 3 4 5 special situation that they need to be aware of. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Note Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 156 English If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry 6 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] to send alert via manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID>does not exist. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 157 English Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat 3. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. 3 4 5 t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 158 English If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 159 English 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows Sending req. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the single site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the single site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 160 English 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. Wi-Fi This feature allows you to turn Wi-Fi on or off. Wi-Fi can be used for wireless programming of the radio with the Radio Management tool. Note Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The following methods are options on how to turn Wi-

Fi on or off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the preprogrammed button:

161 English a) To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the radio menu button:

a) or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the front display. signal strength indicator, In addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. 2 Press to exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 162 English Utilities Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Emergency Call (Incoming Only) Note The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The following methods are options on how to view recent calls. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Viewing recent calls via the preprogrammed Recent Calls button:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s a) Press the preprogrammed Recent Calls button. or to scroll through the list. b) c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu or Select button directly below Exit, press the PTT button. Viewing recent calls via the radio menu:

or to Rcnt. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. or c) d) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu to scroll through the list. Select button directly below Exit, PTT button. or the The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Using the Flip Display This feature allows you to flip the content of the top display upside down. It is particularly useful when you 163 English would like to read the top display while the radio is still in the carry holder attached to your belt. To flip the display, press and hold the preprogrammed Light/Flip button Selecting a Basic Zone Bank The Basic Zone Select feature must to be preprogrammed to the 3-position A-B-C switch, while the Basic Zone Bank feature must be preprogrammed to any side button or Top (Orange) button before you can use this feature. This feature allows twice as many zones to be accessed from a switch, doubling the amount of switch positions. Use the preprogrammed Basic Zone Bank button to toggle the position between Bank 1 and Bank 2. The top display shows the status icons (A, B, C, D, E or F) or the zone name based on the bank and switch position selected. Note See the Basic Zone Bank 1 and Basic Zone Bank 2 icons for more information on the status icons. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 164 English Selecting an Enhanced Zone Bank This feature is created in order to allow users to communicate in more zones. An Enhanced Zone Bank (EZB) consists of three zones. This also means each icon A, B, C, ... or Y consist of three zones. You can use the preprogrammed 3-position A-B-C switch to select the first, second or third zone in an EZB. This feature allows user to navigate from up to 75 zones in 25 EZBs. Note The Zone Select feature must to be preprogrammed to the 3-position A-B-C switch, while the Enhanced Zone Bank feature must be preprogrammed to any side button or Top (Orange) button before you can use this feature. 1 Press the preprogrammed EZB Up or EZB Down button to scroll the EZB up or down or press and hold the preprogrammed EZB Up or EZB Down button to fast scroll the EZB up or down. 2 Turn the 3-Position A/B/C Switch to select the first, second or third zone in the selected EZB. Selecting the Power Level Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. These reduced transmit power level settings do not affect the receiving performance of your radio, nor diminish the overall quality of the audio and data functionality of the radio given the following conditions. Power level Low enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level High enables a longer transmitting distance. The following methods are options on how to select the power level. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level via the Transmit Power Level switch:

a) Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level via the radio menu:

or to Pwr. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 165 English hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. The following methods are options on how to select a radio profile. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile via the preprogrammed Profile button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) to scroll through the menu selections. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below or Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. a) Selecting a radio profile via the radio menu:

or to Prfl and press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. b) or to scroll through the menu selections. Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias This feature allows you to display or hide the radio alias (name). Press the Menu Select button directly below MyID. The display shows momentary Radio ID off, and the radio alias disappears from the Home screen or the display shows momentary Radio ID on, and the radio alias appears on the Home screen. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 166 English Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio's front display. Perform one of the following actions:

To toggle the backlight on or off, press the preprogrammed Light/Flip button. To turn the backlight on, press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Navigation button, or any programmable radio controls or buttons. Locking and Unlocking the Keypad and Controls You can lock the keypad, programmable buttons, rotary knobs, and switches of your radio to avoid inadvertent entry. Check with your dealer or qualified technician for best selection to suit your usage. 1 Toggle the preprogrammed Keypad/Control Lock button or switch to on. The display shows Kypd/Ctrl Lock. 2 Toggle again to unlock the controls. Turning the Controls and Keypad Buttons Tones On or Off You can enable and disable the tones of Navigation buttons, controls and keypad if needed. Turning the tones on or off via the preprogrammed Mute button:

a) To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Mute button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Turning the tones on or off via the radio menu:

or to Mute. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. The following methods are options on how to turn Voice Mute on or off. The result of all the methods is 167 English the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Voice Mute off or on via the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a) To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off via the radio menu:

or to VMut. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. The display shows momentary Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 168 English The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Time and Date Setup You can set the time and date for your radio. Settings:

The default time setting is a 12-hour clock. The display shows 12:00AM. The AM/PM selection is not available for the 24-

hour clock setting. The default setting for the domestic date shows MDY. Note Check with your dealer or system administrator for additional programmable settings for this feature. Editing the Time and Date 1 or to Clck. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Clck. The display shows the current setting of the radio. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The first item blinks. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to change the selected item. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or one or more times to move to an item you wish to change. selected item. to change the or Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes and return to the Home screen. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished to save your changes and return to the Home screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to discard all changes and return to the Home screen. Press without saving your changes. at any time to return to the Home screen Note If a call arrives while the radio is in the clock-setting menu, the radio exits clock setting and displays the call information. Any changes made before the call is not saved. 169 English Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Analog Options Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available

(preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Result You hear any digital traffic. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 170 English Option Normal Squelch Selective Switch Result You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch

(DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear any activity on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-

channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. The following table shows the variations of smart PTT:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use Quick-Key Override. This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-

keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit. Quick-Key Override 171 English Transmit Inhibit Enabling Transmit Inhibition This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio could receive messages but not replying the acknowledgement request of the received message. User could physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. Note Acknowledgement of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 172 English Perform one of the following actions:

Switch the preprogrammed Transmit Inhibit switch to Transmit Inhibit enabled. or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Press the Transmit Inhibit programmable button. Note If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit on. You hear a sequence of short, lowhigh tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, lowpitched tone (reject tone). Note The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. Disabling Transmit Inhibition The information shown are:

Perform one of the following actions:

Switch the preprogrammed Transmit Inhibit switch to Transmit Inhibit disabled position. or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Press the Transmit Inhibit programmable button. Note If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit off. You hear a sequence of short, highlow tone (Transmit Inhibit Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. Charge Percentage Remaining Capacity Estimated Charges Accessing the Battery Info screen Percentage of current battery capacity. Remaining power of the battery in mAh. Number of charges cycles the battery has gone through. 1 or to Batt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Batt. The display shows the details of the battery. 3 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. IMPRES Battery Annunciator This feature displays the current capacity and charges cycles of your battery when an IMPRES Battery is powering your radio. This feature must be enabled in your radio to see the information. General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information Control Assignments IP Display A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 173 English Soft ID (If enabled) Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version Option Board Type (optional) Option Board Bluetooth Address Expansion Board Type (optional) DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band(s) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 174 English Processor Version Option Board Serial Number (optional) Option Board Software Version (optional) Language Pack ID and Version (only when the language of the display is set to non-English) MAC Address Secure HW Type Secure HW Version Note To return to the Home screen, press time. at any 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Information screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. to return to the Home screen . Press Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 28 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 1 Perform one of the following actions:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the IP Info screen. 2 or to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Control Map screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. or to scroll through the various information. 175 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Editing the Soft ID Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to change your username. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Soft ID screen. 4 Use the keypad to edit the text. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to save the new Soft ID and return to the previous screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 2 or to Soft ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the current Soft ID. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the current Soft ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. 176 English Helpful Tips Radio Care Caution Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the with any radio. Never poke this vent objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radios submergibility will be lost.

(For APX 8000 R Radios Only) Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum H e p l f u l i T p s submersion time of 2 hours. Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio.

(For APX 8000 R Radios Only) Elastomer technology materials used for seals in rugged portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola recommends that rugged radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the watertight integrity of the radio. Motorola details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment needed to inspect, maintain and troubleshoot radio seals in the radios service manual. If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Otherwise, the water could short-circuit the radio. If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. 177 English A Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician. connectors, controls or crevices. Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. 3 Clean battery contacts with a lint-free cloth to remove dirt or grease. Proper Ways to Handle the Radio Cleaning Your Radio Caution Do not use solvents to clean your radio as most chemicals may permanently damage the radio housing and textures. Do not submerge the radio in the detergent solution. To clean the external surfaces of your radio, follow the procedure described next. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild dishwashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-

metallic, shortbristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. Never carry the radio by the antenna. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Do not submerge the radio unless it is a ruggedized.(APX 8000 R model) Avoid subjecting the radio to corrosives, solvents or chemicals. Do not disassemble the radio. Caution Do not use the radio without an accessory connector or a dust cover in place as contamination can build up on the contacts. When charging the radio using a wall mounted charger, the radio must be turned off. Otherwise, the Man Down Alert and Emergency may be accidentally triggered. s p T i l u f p e H l 178 English Radio Service and Repair Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Battery Care Battery Charge Status the LED and sounds. the fuel gauge icon on the display. Your radio can indicate the batterys charge status through:

You can also check the battery charge status via the menu entry. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 173 for more information. LED and Sounds When your battery is low:

the LED blinks red when the PTT button is pressed. you hear a low-battery chirp (short, high-pitched tone). H e p l f u l i T p s Fuel Gauge Icons A blinking fuel gauge icon ( ) is displayed only when the battery voltage drops to low level. In this case, replace the battery with a fully charged one. Gauge Battery Charge 76% to 100% full[3]

Top Display:

51% to 75%[3]

179 English Gauge Top Display:

Top Display:

Top Display:

Battery Charge Gauge Battery Charge 10% or less (at 10%, the gauge begins blinking) 26% to 50%[3]

Top Display:

11% to 25%[3]

Battery Recycling and Disposal In the U.S. and Canada, Motorola participates in the nationwide Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC) program for battery collection and recycling. Many retailers and dealers participate in this program. For the location of the drop-off facility closest to you, access RBRC's Internet web site at www.rbrc.com or call 1-800-8-BATTERY. This internet site and telephone number also provide other useful s p T i l u f p e H l 180 3 These are for IMPRES battery operation only. English information concerning recycling options for consumers, businesses, and governmental agencies. H e p l f u l i T p s 181 English Accessories The accessory link below is for APX radios. Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all APX models and/or bandsplits. Please refer to the specific APX radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Note GPS only antenna is only used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. s e i r o s s e c c A 182 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

bearing (state whether you are using true or latitude and longitude magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 183 English on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Number Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 184 English 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 185 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 Note

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. Note A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources Input Voltage

(Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impedance RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 186 English Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. ACK Active Channel Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 ASTRO Conventional Autoscan Bluetooth Acknowledgment of communication. A channel that has traffic on it. An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Bluetooth is an open wireless technology standard for exchanging data over short distances from fixed and mobile devices with high levels of security. l G o s s a r y Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth pairing occurs when Call Alert Carrier Squelch two bluetooth devices exchanged a passkey to form a paired Bluetooth wireless connection. Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the 187 English Channel Control Channel Conventional Conventional Scan List COTS Cursor operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/ data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater (see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Commercial Off-The-Shelf A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Deadlock Digital Private Line (DPL) Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping DSR EID Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio. The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Dynamic System Resilience Encrypted Integrated Data y r a s s o G l 188 English ESN Failsoft FCC FM Hang Up Home screen IV&D KVL LCD LED Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Integrated Voice and Data Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display. Light-emitting diode. Li-Ion Man Down MCW MDC Menu Entry Monitor Lithium ion. A life-saving feature that senses the radio user may be in trouble by monitoring the whether the radio is in a vertical or horizontal position or whether the radio is motionless. When this feature is triggered, the radio alerts the user with audio and visual alerts. It can also trigger Emergency Alarm the Post-Alert Timer is not cancelled. Mission Critical Wireless Motorola Data Communication A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the

,

, and buttons. Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear l G o s s a r y 189 English static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Nickel-metal-hydride. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Operation Critical Wireless Over-the-air rekeying. Page Personality PIN PremierOne Preprogrammed Private

(Conversation) Call A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number A software application which streamlines critical real time operations and simplifies system administration to deliver accurate, consistent and integrated information remotely to the requestors. Refers to a software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. Private Line (PL) A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code NiMH Non-Tactical/

Revert y r a s s o G l 190 English OCW OTAR Programmable PTT Radio Frequency

(RF) Repeater Selective Call Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-

transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to Selective Switch Squelch SSI Standby Status Calls Tactical/ Non-

Revert conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. Synchronous Serial Interface An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. l G o s s a r y 191 English degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. A grouping of channels. Zone Talkaround Talkgroup TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard

(formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 y r a s s o G l 192 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX 8000 Portable Units Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year For LACR region:

ASTRO APX 8000 Portable Units Product Accessories Three (3) Years One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 193 English ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MOTOROLA offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLAS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA designated delivery service. MOTOROLA will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLAS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 194 English PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which 195 English adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 196 English VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y VIII. For Australia Only:

This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may 197 English have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/

Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 198 English Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. June 2015.

*MN001425A01*

MN001425A01-AA

 

 

6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AND PRODUCT SAFETY GUIDE FOR PORTABLE TWO-WAY RADIOS ATTENTION!

Before using this radio, read this guide which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20072015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7223H*

NNTN7223H

*6881095C98*

6881095C98-LA English 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 2 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the occupational limits in FCC and International standards. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population consumer use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 3 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Please refer to the following websites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/downloads/dow07-

rfexposureassessmentstand Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Regulations When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a product label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF Exposure Product Label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and International standards and guidelines (listed below) for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE (FCC) and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environments at operating duty factors of up to 50% talk-50%

listen and is approved for occupational use only. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with these exposure guidelines, your radio generates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 4 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM NOTE: The approved batteries, supplied with this radio, are rated for a 5-5-90 duty factor (5% talk-5% listen-90% standby) even though this radio complies with FCC occupational exposure limits and may operate at duty factors of up to 50% talk. Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. & FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6 & Industry Canada RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANATEL ANNEX to Resolution No. 303 et seq. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Two-Way Radio Operations To control your exposure and ensure compliance with the occupational/controlled environment exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. DO NOT remove the RF Exposure Label from the device. User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. English 4 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 5 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Two-Way Radio Operation Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. The PTT button may reside on the radio itself or may be hosted on approved wired or wireless (for example, a Bluetooth enabled remote Push-to-Talk button) accessories. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). In front of the face. Hold the radio in a vertical position with the microphone (and other parts of the radio including the antenna) at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) away from the nose or lips. Keeping the radio at a proper distance is important to ensure compliance. NOTE: RF exposures decrease with increasing distance from the antenna. Body Worn Operation. When worn on the body, always place the radio in a Motorola-approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. Using approved body-worn accessories is important because the use of non-

Motorola-approved accessories may result in exposure levels, which exceed the occupational/controlled environment RF exposure limits. Use only Motorola-approved supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and audio accessories. Use of non-Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and wired or wireless accessories may exceed the applicable RF exposure guidelines (iEEE, ICNIRP or FCC). For a list of Motorola-approved accessories for your radio model, visit the following website: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/

Business+Product+and+Services/Accessories/Two-Way+Radio+Accessories 5 English 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 6 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers, Defibrillators or other Implanted Medical Devices Persons with pacemakers, Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators (ICDs) or other active implantable medical devices (AIMD) should:

Consult with their physicians regarding the potential risk of interference from radio frequency transmitters, such as portable radios (poorly shielded medical devices may be more susceptible to interference). Turn the radio OFF immediately if they have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Do not carry the radio in a chest pocket or near the implantation site, and carry or use the radio on the opposite side of their body from the implantable device to minimize the potential for interference. English 6 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 7 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radios may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Use of Communication Devices While Driving Always check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the areas where you drive. Give full attention to driving and to the road. Use hands-free operation, if available. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call, if driving conditions or regulations so require. 7 English 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 8 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:

Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicle With Air Bags:

Refer to vehicle manufacturer's manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT place a portable radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. English 8 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 9 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Operational Warnings (Continued) W A R N I N G Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

(Explosive atmospheres refers to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, or dusts.) Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a portable radio type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, UL, ATEX, or IECEx). DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: "Turn off two-way radio." Obey all signs and instructions. 9 English 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 10 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Operational Cautions C a u t i o n Antennas DO NOT use any portable radio that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Operational Warnings Batteries Dos and Donts Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries. Follow these general Dos and Donts to avoid injury and damage. DO'S Do exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placed inside a pocket, purse, or container with metal objects. Do charge your battery using Motorola-approved battery charger. Charging your battery in a non-Motorola equipment may lead to reduced performance and battery damage. Do use your battery in accordance with its water and/or dust Ingress Protection (IP) rating. Refer to your user guide and product specifications sheet for more information on relevant operating environments. English 10 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 11 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Operational Cautions (Continued) C a u t i o n Batteries Dos and Donts (Continued) DONTS Do not discard battery in a fire. Do not replace battery in any area labeled Hazardous Atmosphere. Any sparks created in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source, such as a hair dryer or microwave oven. If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water, dry and clean the battery contacts before attaching the battery. Do not allow conductive material such as jewelry, keys or beaded to touch exposed battery terminals as the conductive material may complete electrical circuit, or short circuit, and become hot. Hazardous Locations Radio Information The Hazardous Locations approval unit refers to a product that has been approved for use in Hazardous Locations by an approval agency (for example FM Approvals, CSA, UL, ATEX, or IECEx) and certifies that a particular product meets the Agency's applicable Hazardous Locations standards. A portable radio that has been approved for Hazardous Locations will have an Approval label attached to the radio to identify the unit as Approved for specified hazardous atmospheres. This label specifies the Hazardous Locations Class/Division/Group along with the part number of the battery that must be used with the approved radio. 11 English 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 12 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Operational Cautions for Hazardous Locations Radio Equipment C a u t i o n DO NOT operate radio communications equipment in a hazardous atmosphere unless it is a type especially certified (for example, FM, UL, CSA, ATEX, or IECEx). The use of non-Approved unit could result in an unsafe condition. DO NOT operate a radio unit that has been approved for use in Hazardous Locations if it has been physically damaged (for example, cracked housing). This could result in an unsafe condition. DO NOT replace or charge batteries in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing batteries. DO NOT use the radio in Hazardous Locations other than the permitted classification it is rated to. Radios must ship from a Motorola manufacturing facility with the Hazardous Locations approved design and label (FM, UL, CSA, ATEX, IECEx). Radios will not be upgraded to this capability and labeled once they have been shipped to the field. A modification changes the units hardware from its Approved certified design configuration. Modifications can only be done by the original product manufacturer. Further warnings and instructions for the safe use of radios in Hazardous Locations can be found in the specific Hazardous Locations safety manual. English 12 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM GUIA DE SEGURANA DO PRODUTO E EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RF PARA RDIOS PORTTEIS BIDIRECIONAIS ATENO!

Antes de usar o rdio, leia este guia que contm instrues operacionais importantes para uso seguro, informaes sobre conscientizao e controle de exposio energia de radiofrequn-

cia (RF) para conformidade com os padres e regulamentos aplicveis. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS e o logotipo "M" estilizado so marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC e so utilizadas sob licena. Todas as demais marcas registradas so de propriedade de seus respectivos proprietrios. 20072015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Portugus

(Brasil) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 2 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio RF e Instrues Operacionais para Uso Ocupacional COMUNICADO: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios tm total conhecimento de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre sua exposio para atender aos limites ocupacionais definidos pela FCC e pelos padres internacionais. O dispositivo de rdio NO autorizado para uso pela populao em geral. Este rdio bidirecional usa energia eletromagntica no espectro de RF para fornecer comunicao entre dois ou mais usurios distncia. Ele usa energia de RF ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Outras formas incluem, mas no so limitadas a, raios, raios solares e raios X. A energia de RF, entretanto, no deve ser confundida com essas outras formas de energia eletromagntica, que quando so usadas incorretamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito altos de raios X, por exemplo, podem danificar tecidos e material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstrias trabalham com organizaes para desenvolver padres de exposio segura energia de RF. Esses padres fornecem nveis recomendados de exposio RF para trabalhadores e para o pblico em geral. Os nveis recomendados de exposio RF incluem margens de segurana substanciais. Todos os rdios bidirecionais da Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados para garantir que atendam aos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelo governo. Alm disso, os fabricantes tambm recomendam instrues operacionais especficas para usurios de rdios bidirecionais. Essas instrues so importantes porque informam aos usurios sobre a exposio energia de RF e fornecem procedimentos simples sobre como controlar essa exposio. Portugus

(Brasil) 2 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 3 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Consulte os sites a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/downloads/dow07-

rfexposureassessmentstand Regulamentos da FCC Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, a FCC (Federal Communication Commission, comisso federal de comunicao) requer que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. A conscientizao da exposio pode ser facilitada pelo uso de uma etiqueta no produto, direcionando o usurio para informaes de conscientizao especficas do usurio. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola possui uma Etiqueta no Produto sobre Exposio RF. Alm disso, o manual do usurio da Motorola, ou folheto de segurana em separado, inclui informaes e instrues operacionais necessrias para controlar a exposio RF e atender aos requisitos de conformidade. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF O rdio bidirecional da Motorola foi projetado e testado para estar em confor-

midade com vrios padres e com as diretrizes nacionais e internacionais

(listados a seguir) para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Este rdio est em conformidade com os limites de exposio IEEE (FCC) e ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais/controlados de exposio RF em fatores operacionais de trabalho de at 50% de fala e 50% de escuta e est aprovado apenas para uso ocupacional. Para medio de energia de RF para conformidade com essas diretrizes de exposio, o rdio gera energia de RF mensurvel apenas quando est transmitindo (na fala), no quando est recebendo (escuta) ou no modo de espera. 3 Portugus

(Brasil) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 4 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM NOTA: As baterias aprovadas, fornecidas com o rdio, so para um fator de trabalho 5-5-90 (5% de fala-5% de escuta-90% de espera) apesar de o rdio estar em conformidade com os limites de exposio ocupacional da FCC e poder operar em fatores de trabalho de at 50% de fala. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola est em conformidade com os seguintes padres e diretrizes de exposio de energia de RF:

Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais da FCC; 47 CFR et seq. e FCC, OET Boletim 65 IEEE C95.1 ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-ionizing Radiation Protection, comisso internacional para a proteo contra as radiaes no ionizantes) Cdigo de segurana 6 do Ministrio da Sade (Canad) e da Indstria Canadense RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANEXO da ANATEL Resoluo n 303 et seq. Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF e Instrues Operacionais Relacionadas a Operaes de Rdios Bidirecionais Para controlar a exposio e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio em ambientes ocupacionais/controlados, siga sempre os procedimentos a seguir. NO remova a Etiqueta de Exposio RF do dispositivo. As instrues de conscientizao do usurio devem acompanhar o dispositivo quando transferido para outros usurios. Portugus

(Brasil) 4 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 5 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Operao do Rdio Bidirecional No transmitir alm do fator calculado nominal de 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. O boto PTT pode estar localizado no rdio ou em acessrios aprovados com ou sem fio (por exemplo, um boto PTT remoto compatvel com Bluetooth). importante transmitir em 50% do tempo ou menos, pois este rdio gera exposio RF mensurvel somente ao transmitir

(em termos de medio para conformidade de padres). Em frente ao rosto. Segure o rdio na posio vertical com o microfone (e outras partes do rdio incluindo a antena) a, no mnimo, 2,5 centmetros de distncia do nariz e da boca. Manter o rdio a uma distncia apropriada importante para garantir a conformidade. NOTA: Quanto maior o distanciamento da antena, menores as exposies RF. Uso junto ao corpo. Ao usar o rdio junto ao corpo, coloque-o em um prendedor, suporte, suporte para cinto ou estojo para este produto aprovado pela Motorola. importante usar os acessrios aprovados para uso junto ao corpo, porque o uso de acessrios no aprovados pela Motorola pode resultar em nveis de exposio que excedem os limites de exposio RF para ambiente ocupacional/controlado. Use somente antenas, baterias e acessrios de udio fornecidos ou de substituio aprovados pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, baterias e acessrios com ou sem fio no aprovados pela Motorola pode exceder as diretrizes aplicveis de exposio RF (iEEE, ICNIRP ou FCC). Para obter uma lista de acessrios aprovados pela Motorola para o modelo de seu rdio, acesse o site: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/

Business+Product+and+Services/Accessories/Two-Way+Radio+Accessories 5 Portugus

(Brasil) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 6 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Interferncia/Compatibilidade Eletromagntica NOTA: Quase todo dispositivo eletrnico suscetvel interferncia eletromagntica (EMI) quando blindado, projetado ou de alguma forma configurado inadequadamente para compatibilidade eletromagntica. Instalaes Para evitar interferncia eletromagntica e/ou conflitos de compatibilidade, desligue o rdio em qualquer instalao onde haja avisos dizendo para faz-lo. Hospitais e casas de sade podem utilizar equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Aeronaves Desligue seu rdio a bordo de aeronaves, quando orientado a faz-lo. O rdio deve ser utilizado de acordo com as instrues fornecidas pela tripulao. Equipamentos Mdicos Marca-passos, desfibriladores ou outros dispositivos mdicos implantados Pessoas com marca-passos, desfibriladores cardiovasculares implantveis

(ICDs) ou outros dispositivos mdicos implantveis ativos (AIMD) devem:

Entre e contato com seus mdicos sobre o possvel risco de interferncia de transmissores frequncia de rdio, como rdios portteis (dispositivos mdicos com pouca proteo podem ser mais suscetveis interferncia). DESLIGUE o rdio imediatamente se houver qualquer motivo para se suspeitar de interferncia. No carregue o rdio em um bolso prximo ao peito ou rea do implante;

transporte ou use o rdio no lado oposto do dispositivo implantvel para minimizar possveis interferncias. Portugus

(Brasil) 6 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 7 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Aparelhos Auditivos Alguns rdios digitais sem fio podem interferir em aparelhos auditivos. Caso haja esse tipo de interferncia, consulte o fabricante do aparelho auditivo para obter alternativas. Outros Equipamentos Mdicos Caso use outros equipamentos mdicos, consulte o fabricante para verificar se ele est adequadamente protegido contra energia de RF. Seu mdico pode ajud-lo a obter essas informaes. Uso de Equipamentos de Comunicao Durante a Operao de Veculos Informe-se sempre sobre as leis e normas a respeito do uso de rdios nas reas onde voc dirige. Preste ateno no trnsito e na rodovia. Use a opo viva-voz, se disponvel. Saia da rodovia e estacione o carro antes de fazer ou receber uma ligao, se as condies de trnsito ou as regulamentaes assim exigirem. 7 Portugus

(Brasil) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 8 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Segurana Acstica A exposio a rudos muito altos de qualquer origem por longos perodos pode prejudicar sua audio temporria ou permanentemente. Quanto mais alto for o volume do rdio, menos tempo ser necessrio para prejudicar sua audio. s vezes, os danos auditivos causados por rudos fortes no so detectados em sua fase inicial e podem ter efeito cumulativo. Para proteger sua audio:

Use o volume mais baixo necessrio para a execuo da sua tarefa. Aumente o volume somente se estiver em ambientes barulhentos. Reduza o volume antes de conectar o headset ou o fone de ouvido. Limite o tempo de uso dos headsets ou fones de ouvido com volume alto. Ao usar o rdio sem monofones ou fones de ouvido, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio diretamente em contato com seus ouvidos. Avisos Operacionais AV I S O Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bag:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO coloque um rdio porttil na rea sobre um air bag ou na rea de liberao do air bag, pois eles inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio porttil estiver colocado na rea de liberao do air bag e o air bag inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar srios ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Portugus

(Brasil) 8 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 9 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Avisos Operacionais (continuao) AV I S O Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos

(Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos.) Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em uma rea com atmosfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que ele seja um tipo de rdio porttil especialmente qualificado para o uso em tais reas como Intrinsecamente Seguro (por exemplo, Factory Mutual, CSA, UL, ATEX ou IECEx). NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e at mesmo em morte. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos referidas acima incluem reas de abastecimento, como reas abaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustveis e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como:

"Desligue o rdio bidirecional." Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 9 Portugus

(Brasil) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 10 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Cuidados Operacionais

!

Ateno Antenas NO utilize um rdio porttil com antena danificada. Se a antena danificada entrar em contato com sua pele, poder causar uma queimadura leve. Avisos Operacionais Regras para o Uso das Baterias A maioria dos problemas relacionados bateria causado pelo manuseio incorreto. Siga estas regras gerais para evitar danos ou ferimentos. SIM Tenha cuidado ao manipular uma bateria carregada, principalmente quando guardada dentro do bolso, de uma bolsa ou em local em que haja objetos de metal. Carregue a bateria usando um carregador aprovado pela Motorola. Carregar a bateria com um equipamento que no seja da Motorola pode reduzir o desempenho e danificar a bateria. Use a bateria de acordo com a sua classificao de Proteo contra a Entrada de gua e/ou poeira (IP). Consulte o guia do usurio e a folha de especificaes do produto para obter mais informaes sobre relevantes ambientes operacionais. Portugus

(Brasil) 10 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 11 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Cuidados Operacionais (Continuao)

!

Ateno Regras para o Uso das Baterias (Continuao) NO No descarte a bateria no fogo. No troque a bateria em lugares identificados como reas de risco. Quaisquer fascas criadas em uma atmosfera potencialmente explosiva podero causar uma exploso ou incndio. No desmonte, comprima, perfure, fragmente ou tente alterar de outra maneira a forma da bateria. No seque baterias molhadas ou midas usando aparelhos ou fontes de calor, como secadores de cabelo ou fornos de micro-ondas. Se os terminais de contato da bateria ficarem submersos na gua, seque e limpe os contatos da bateria antes de coloc-la no rdio. No permita que material condutor como joias, chaves ou correntes entre em contato os terminais da bateria. O material condutor pode completar um circuito eltrico ou curto-circuito e aquecer. Informaes do Rdio em Locais de Risco A unidade de aprovao Locais de Risco refere-se a um produto que foi aprovado para uso em Locais de Risco por um rgo de aprovao

(por exemplo, FM Approvals, CSA, UL, ATEX ou IECEx) e certifica que um determinado produto atende aos padres aplicveis do rgo para Locais de Risco. Um rdio porttil que foi aprovado para Locais de Risco apresentar uma etiqueta de Aprovao para identificar a unidade como Aprovada para o uso nas atmosferas de risco especificadas. Essa etiqueta especifica a classe, a diviso e o grupo dos Locais de Risco, bem como o nmero de pea da bateria que dever ser utilizada com o rdio aprovado. 11 Portugus

(Brasil) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 12 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Cuidados Operacionais para Equipamentos de Rdio em Locais de Risco

!

Ateno NO opere o equipamento de comunicaes de rdio em atmosferas de risco a menos que ele seja de um tipo especialmente certificado

(por exemplo, FM, UL, CSA, ATEX ou IECEx). O uso de uma unidade no aprovada pode resultar em uma condio insegura. NO opere uma unidade de rdio aprovada para o uso em Locais de Risco se ela estiver danificada fisicamente (por exemplo, parte externa rachada). Isso pode resultar em uma condio insegura. NO substitua ou carregue baterias em atmosfera de risco. Podem ocorrer fascas nos contatos durante a instalao ou remoo das baterias. NO use o rdio em Locais de Risco alm dos permitidos pela classificao do equipamento. Os rdios devem ser fornecidos de uma instalao de fabricao da Motorola com o projeto aprovado para Locais de Risco e etiqueta (FM, UL, CSA, ATEX, IECEx). Os rdios no sero atualizados para esse recurso e etiquetados depois de serem enviados. Uma modificao altera o hardware da unidade de sua configurao de projeto certificado Aprovado. As modificaes podem ser feitas apenas pelo fabricante original do produto. Outras mensagens e instrues para a utilizao segura de rdios em Locais de Risco podem ser encontradas no manual de segurana para Locais de Risco especfico. Portugus

(Brasil) 12 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM RADIOS BIDIRECTIONNELLES PORTATIVES :

EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRQUENCES ET SCURIT DU PRODUIT ATTENTION!

Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez le guide qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et DES informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logotype au M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs titulaires respectifs. Motorola Solutions, Inc., 20072015. Tous droits rservs. Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 2 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Sensibilisation l'exposition l'nergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes d'utilisation pour l'usage professionnel de cette radio NOTICE : Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par la FCC et les normes internationales. Ce dispositif radio n'est PAS autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de l'nergie lectromagntique dans le spectre de radiofrquence (RF) afin de permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise l'nergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. L'nergie de RF est une forme d'nergie lectromagntique. Ce type d'nergie se prsente sous d'autres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre l'nergie de RF avec d'autres formes d'nergie lectromagntique qui, lorsqu'elles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Des spcialistes dans les domaines des sciences, de l'ingnierie, de la mdecine, de la sant et de l'industrie travaillent avec diffrentes organisations l'laboration de normes relatives l'exposition scuritaire l'nergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands d'exposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands d'exposition aux RF comprennent des coefficients de scurit apprciables. Franais canadien 2 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 3 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux d'exposition aux radiofrquences tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisqu'elles informent les utilisateurs sur l'exposition l'nergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie de RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences :

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/fr/

http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/downloads/dow07-

rfexposureassessmentstand Rglements de la Commission fdrale amricaine des communications (FCC) Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation des utilisateurs l'exposition aux radiofrquences en apposant des tiquettes de produit leur offrant une rfrence vers la source d'information approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences. D'autre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment les informations requises et le mode d'emploi permettant de contrler l'exposition l'nergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. 3 Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 4 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites d'exposition tablies par l'IEEE (FCC) et l'ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle d'exposition aux radiofrquences, des cycles d'utilisation allant jusqu' 50 % mission50 % rception et est approuve pour un usage professionnel seulement. En ce qui concerne la mesure de l'nergie de RF afin d'valuer la conformit ces normes d'exposition, la radio met de l'nergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsqu'elle est en mode mission (lorsque l'utilisateur parle), et non pas lorsqu'elle est en mode rception (lorsque l'utilisateur coute) ni en mode Attente. REMARQUE : Les batteries approuves, fournies avec cette radio, sont cotes en fonction d'un cycle d'utilisation de 5-5-90 (5 % mission5 %

rception90 % attente), mme si la radio respecte les limites d'exposition tablies par la FCC pour l'usage professionnel et peut fonctionner selon des cycles d'utilisation allant jusqu'

50 % mission. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives l'exposition l'nergie de RF :

Commission fdrale amricaine des communications (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations (code de la rglementation fdrale); FCC 47 partie CFR et suiv. FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants

(ICNIRP) Franais canadien 4 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 5 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Code de scurit 6 du Ministre de la Sant (Canada) et norme CNR-102 d'Industrie Canada Norme de l'Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications et suiv. ANATEL ANNEXE la Rsolution N 303 et suiv. Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF et directives de fonctionnement pour la communication bidirectionnelle Pour contrler votre exposition et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition en milieu professionnel ou contrl, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. NE dcollez PAS l'tiquette sur l'exposition l'nergie de RF du dispositif. Lorsque l'appareil est cd d'autres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs. Communication bidirectionnelle Transmission ne dpassant pas le facteur nominal de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton de transmission. Le bouton PTT peut se trouver sur la radio elle-mme ou sur un accessoire avec ou sans fil approuv (par exemple, un bouton de transmission Bluetooth distant). Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont l'exposition n'est mesurable que lors de l'mission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure). Devant le visage. Tenez la radio la verticale, en maintenant une distance d'au moins 2,5 centimtres (1 pouce) entre le micro (et les autres parties de la radio, y compris l'antenne) et le nez ou les lvres. Garder la radio une distance approprie est important afin de garantir le respect des limites. 5 Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 6 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM REMARQUE : L'exposition aux radiofrquences diminue quand la distance de l'antenne augmente. Utilisation lorsque la radio est porte sur soi. Lorsque la radio est porte sur soi, utilisez toujours une pince ou une attache de ceinture, placez-la dans un tui ou dans un harnais pour le corps approuv par Motorola pour ce produit. Il est important d'utiliser des accessoires ajusts au corps qui sont approuvs, car dans le cas contraire, l'utilisateur risque de s'exposer des niveaux d'nergie de RF suprieurs aux limites tablies pour les environnements professionnels ou exposition contrle. N'utilisez que des antennes, des batteries et des accessoires audio fournis ou de remplacement approuvs par Motorola. L'utilisation d'antennes, batteries et accessoires avec ou sans fil non approuvs par Motorola pourrait excder les directives d'exposition aux RF applicables (IEEE, ICNIRP ou FCC). Pour une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola pour votre modle de radio, visitez le site Web suivant : http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/

Business+Product+and+Services/Accessories/Two-Way+Radio+Accessories Interfrence/compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE : La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles l'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) s'ils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou s'ils ne sont pas conus ou configurs afin d'tre compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Btiments Afin d'viter des problmes d'interfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio lorsque cette consigne est affiche sur un panneau. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles l'nergie de RF externe. Franais canadien 6 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 7 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Aronefs bord d'un avion, teignez la radio lorsque l'quipage vous le demande. Toute utilisation de la radio doit se faire conformment aux rglements en vigueur de la compagnie arienne et sur instructions de l'quipage. Appareils mdicaux Stimulateurs cardiaques, dfibrillateurs ou autres appareils mdicaux implants Les personnes portant un stimulateur cardiaque, un dfibrillateur implantable ou autre appareil mdical actif implant doivent :

Consulter leur mdecin au sujet des risques potentiels d'interfrences que prsentent les metteurs radiofrquences, tels que les radios portables (les appareils mdicaux faiblement blinds sont plus vulnrables aux interfrences). teindre la radio immdiatement si elles ont des raisons de penser qu'il existe une interfrence quelconque. Ne pas transporter la radio dans une poche de poitrine ou proximit du site d'implantation de l'appareil mdical, et utiliser la radio du ct oppos celui o se trouve l'appareil afin de minimiser le potentiel d'interfrence. Prothses auditives Certaines radios numriques sans fil peuvent interfrer avec certains types de prothses auditives. Si tel est le cas, veuillez consulter le fabricant de la prothse auditive pour discuter d'autres solutions possibles. Autres dispositifs mdicaux Si vous utilisez tout autre dispositif mdical personnel, consultez le fabricant du dispositif afin de dterminer s'il est convenablement protg contre l'nergie de RF externe. Votre mdecin peut vous aider obtenir ces renseignements. 7 Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 8 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Utilisation de dispositifs de communication pendant la conduite d'un vhicule Vrifiez toujours les lois et rglements relis l'utilisation des radios dans les rgions o vous conduisez. Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route. Utilisez le mode mains libres, s'il est disponible. Rangez-vous sur l'accotement avant de faire un appel ou d'y rpondre si les conditions de conduite sont particulirement mauvaises ou si les lois et rglements l'exigent. Protection de l'oue Une exposition des bruits forts en provenance de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes de temps pourrait affecter votre audition de manire temporaire ou permanente. Plus le volume sonore de la radio est lev, plus votre audition peut se dtriorer rapidement. Des dommages auditifs dus l'exposition des bruits forts peuvent d'abord tre indtectables, mais ceux-ci ont parfois des effets cumulatifs. Pour protger votre audition :

Rglez le volume le plus bas possible pour effectuer votre travail. Montez le volume seulement si vous vous trouvez dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant d'ajouter un casque ou une oreillette. Limitez la priode de temps d'utilisation de casques ou d'couteurs volume lev. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ni couteur, ne placez pas le haut-

parleur directement sur votre oreille. Franais canadien 8 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 9 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Avertissements de fonctionnement AVERTISSEMENT Pour les vhicules quips de coussins gonflables :

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE placez PAS de radio portative dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio portative se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du coussin lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. 9 Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 10 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Avertissements de fonctionnement (suite) AVERTISSEMENT Atmosphres potentiellement explosives

(Les atmosphres explosives sont des endroits classifis comme dangereux, pouvant contenir des vapeurs, des poudres ou des gaz dangereux.) teignez la radio avant d'entrer dans un milieu avec une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, sauf s'il s'agit d'une radio portative de type scurit intrinsque spcialement conue pour l'utilisation dans un tel milieu (par exemple, s'il s'agit d'une radio homologue par Factory Mutual, CSA, UL, ATEX ou IECEx). VITEZ d'enlever, de remplacer ou de recharger les batteries dans un tel milieu. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives mentionnes plus haut, citons les zones de ravitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. Zone de dynamitage et de dtonateurs teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtona-

teurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin d'viter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. Franais canadien 10 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 11 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement

!

Mise en garde Antennes N'utilisez PAS une radio portative, quelle qu'elle soit, dont l'antenne est endommage. Si une antenne endommage entre en contact avec votre peau, il peut en rsulter une brlure lgre. Avertissements de fonctionnement Ce qu'on doit faire et viter avec les batteries La plupart des problmes de batterie proviennent d'une mauvaise manipulation. Suivez ces rgles gnrales pour viter les blessures et les dommages. FAIRE Manipulez avec prcaution les batteries charges, en particulier lorsqu'elles sont places dans une poche, un sac main ou un endroit contenant des objets mtalliques. Rechargez votre batterie avec un chargeur approuv par Motorola. La recharge avec des chargeurs non approuvs par Motorola peut entraner une baisse du rendement et endommager la batterie. Utilisez la batterie conformment son indice de protection (IP) contre l'eau et la poussire. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation et la fiche des caractristiques du produit pour plus d'informations sur les environnements de fonctionnement pertinents. 11 Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 12 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement (suite)

!

Mise en garde Ce quon doit faire et viter avec les batteries (suite) NE PAS FAIRE Ne jetez pas votre batterie au feu. Ne remplacez pas la batterie dans un endroit qui porte la mention atmosphre dangereuse . Une tincelle cre en atmosphres potentiellement explosives peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. Veillez ne pas dmonter, craser, percer, dcouper ou autrement modifier la forme de votre batterie. Ne faites pas scher une batterie mouille ou humide avec un appareil lectrique ou une autre source de chaleur, comme un schoir cheveux ou un four micro-ondes. Si la zone de contact de la batterie de la radio est submerge, nettoyez et schez les contacts de batterie avant de connecter cette dernire lappareil. Ne laissez pas objet conducteur, comme un bijou, une cl ou les mailles d'une chane, entrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Le matriau conducteur risque de fermer un circuit lectrique, ou un court-circuit, et de devenir trs chaud. Franais canadien 12 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 13 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Informations sur l'utilisation de radios dans des endroits dangereux L'homologation pour utilisation dans des endroits dangereux indique qu'un produit a t approuv par un service d'homologation (par exemple, FM Approvals, CSA, UL, ATEX, ou IECEx) afin d'tre utilis dans des endroits dangereux et certifie qu'un produit particulier rpond aux normes applicables du service d'homologation en matire d'endroits dangereux. Une radio portative homologue pour des endroits dangereux doit porter l'tiquette d'homologation correspondante qui l'iden-

tifie comme pouvant tre utilise dans des atmosphres dangereuses spcifies. L'tiquette prcise la catgorie d'endroits dangereux (Classe/Division/Groupe), ainsi que le numro de pice de la batterie qui doit tre utilis. Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement d'quipement radio dans des endroits dangereux

!

Mise en garde NE PAS faire fonctionner d'quipement de communication radio dans une atmosphre dangereuse moins qu'il ne soit d'un type appropri

(par exemple, homologu par FM, UL, CSA, ATEX, ou IECEx). L'utilisation de radio non homologue peut crer une situation de risque. NE PAS faire fonctionner une radio qui a t homologue pour une utilisation dans des endroits dangereux si elle a t endommage physiquement (par exemple, botier fissur). Cela peut entraner une situation de risque. NE PAS remplacer NI charger des batteries dans une atmosphre dangereuse. Des tincelles peuvent se produire lors de l'installation ou du retrait des batteries. N'utilisez PAS la radio dans des endroits dangereux autres que ceux pour lesquels elle est homologue. 13 Franais canadien 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 14 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Les radios doivent tre expdies de l'usine de fabrication Motorola avec les plans de conception et les tiquettes d'homologation pour les endroits dangereux

(FM, UL, CSA, ATEX, IECEx). Les radios ne pourront tre mises niveau afin d'offrir cette caractristique ni tre tiquetes comme telles une fois expdies et achemines sur le terrain. Toute modification change la configuration du modle d'origine des composants de l'unit. Les modifications ne peuvent tre effectues que par le fabricant du produit d'origine. Pour de plus amples avertissements et instructions sur l'utilisation des radios dans les endroits dangereux, consultez le manuel de scurit sur les endroits dangereux. Franais canadien 14 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM GUA DE EXPOSICIN DE ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA Y SEGURIDAD DEL PRODUCTO PARA RADIOS DE DOS VAS PORTTILES ATENCIN Antes de usar este radio, lea esta gua que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes para un uso seguro del dispositivo, e instrucciones para tomar conciencia y controlar la energa de radiofrecuencia con el objetivo de cumplir con las normas y regulaciones correspondientes. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS y el logotipo de la M estilizada son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC y se utilizan bajo licencia. Todas las dems marcas comerciales pertenecen a sus respectivos dueos. 20072015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 2 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Informacin para tomar conciencia y controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso profesional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlar su exposicin para cumplir con los lmites profesionales de la FCC y de los estndares internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio NO est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Este radio de dos vas utiliza energa electromagntica en el espectro de la radiofrecuencia (RF) para lograr la comunicacin a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. Emplea energa de radiofrecuencia (RF) u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Entre otras formas estn, por ejemplo, la luz solar y los rayos X. Sin embargo, no debe confundirse la energa de RF con otras formas de energa electromagntica que, si se usan de manera incorrecta, pueden producir daos biolgicos. Los niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden daar los tejidos y el material gentico. Expertos en ciencias, ingeniera, medicina, salud e industria trabajan con ciertas organizaciones para desarrollar estndares para una exposicin segura a la energa de RF. Estos estndares indican los niveles recomendados de exposicin a radiofrecuencia, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia incluyen mrgenes de proteccin bastante amplios. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 2 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 3 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Todos los radios de dos vas de Motorola han sido diseados, fabricados y probados para garantizar que cumplan con los niveles de exposicin a la radiofrecuencia establecidos por el gobierno. Adems, los fabricantes entregan instrucciones de funcionamiento especficas recomendadas para los usuarios de radios de dos vas. Estas instrucciones son relevantes, ya que informan al usuario acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y ofrecen procedimientos sencillos para controlar dicha energa. Consulte los siguientes sitios web para obtener informacin adicional acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y de cmo controlarla para garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin establecidos:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/downloads/dow07-

rfexposureassessmentstand Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC) Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, la FCC indica que los usuarios deben conocer y poder controlar su nivel de exposicin, a fin de cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. El conocimiento del nivel de exposicin puede proporcionarse mediante una etiqueta de producto que le muestre al usuario informacin de conocimiento especfica para los usuarios. El radio de dos vas de Motorola tiene una etiqueta de producto de exposicin a RF. Asimismo, el manual de usuario de Motorola y el folleto de seguridad que viene aparte incluyen la informacin y las instrucciones de funcionamiento necesarias para controlar la exposicin a RF y cumplir con los requisitos. 3 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 4 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Cumplimiento de los estndares de exposicin a RF El radio de dos vas de Motorola est diseado y probado de manera tal que cumple con varios estndares y lineamientos nacionales e internacionales

(enumerados ms adelante) en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin del IEEE (FCC) y de la ICNIRP para ambientes controlados o de uso profesional con exposicin a radiofrecuencia, con factores de funcionamiento de hasta un 50 % de habla y 50 % de escucha, y est aprobado para uso profesional. En cuanto a la medicin de la energa de RF para el cumplimiento de estos lineamientos de exposicin, el radio genera energa de RF que puede medirse solamente mientras realiza una transmisin (cuando el usuario habla) y no al efectuar la recepcin

(escucha) ni en modo de espera. NOTA: Las bateras aprobadas que se entregan con el radio estn clasificadas para un factor de funcionamiento de 5-5-90 (5 % de habla, 5 % de escucha y 90 % en espera), aunque el radio ya cumpla con los lmites de exposicin en uso profesional de la FCC, y pueden funcionar con factores de funcionamiento de hasta un 50 % de habla. El radio de dos vas de Motorola cumple con los siguientes lineamientos y estndares de exposicin a energa de RF:

Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC, Federal Communications Commission) de los Estados Unidos, Cdigo de Regulaciones Federales; CFR 47 y ss. FCC, Boletn de OET 65 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) C95.1 Comisin Internacional contra las Radiaciones No Ionizantes (ICNIRP, International Commission of Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) Cdigo de seguridad 6 del Ministerio de Salud (Canad) y RSS-102 del Ministerio de Industria de Canad Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 4 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 5 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Estndar de radiocomunicaciones de la entidad de comunicaciones australiana y ss. ANATEL, Anexo a Resolucin No. 303 y ss. Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia (RF) y lineamientos de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios de dos vas Para controlar su nivel de exposicin y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin en ambientes controlados o de uso profesional, siga siempre los siguientes procedimientos. NO retire la etiqueta de exposicin a radiofrecuencia del dispositivo. Los lineamientos referentes al uso seguro por parte del usuario deberan entregarse junto con el dispositivo cuando se transfieran a otros usuarios. Funcionamiento del radio de dos vas No transmita ms all del factor de funcionamiento normal del 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push-to-talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. El botn PTT puede estar en el radio o puede encontrarse en los accesorios con cable o inalmbricos aprobados

(por ejemplo, un botn Push-to-Talk remoto con Bluetooth). La transmisin del 50 % del tiempo, o menos, es importante, porque este radio genera una exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia que solamente se puede medir durante la transmisin (en trminos de medicin para el cumplimiento de los estndares). Al frente de la cara. Sostenga el radio en posicin vertical frente a la cara con el micrfono (y las dems partes del radio, incluida la antena) al menos a 2,5 cm (1 pulg.) de distancia de la nariz o los labios. Mantener el radio a una distancia adecuada es importante para garantizar el cumplimiento. 5 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 6 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM NOTA: La exposicin a las radiofrecuencias disminuye cuando aumenta la distancia de la antena. Funcionamiento del equipo ajustado al cuerpo. Siempre que use el radio ajustado al cuerpo, pngalo en un clip, un soporte, un estuche, una funda o un arns para el cuerpo aprobado por Motorola para el producto. Es importante el uso de accesorios para llevar el equipo en el cuerpo, porque el uso de accesorios que no estn aprobados por Motorola puede causar que el nivel de exposicin supere los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia en ambientes profesionales o controlados. Use nicamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de audio de repuesto suministradas o aprobadas por Motorola. El uso de antenas, bateras y accesorios con cable o inalmbricos no autorizados por Motorola puede exceder los lineamientos sobre la exposicin a RF aplicables (IEEE, ICNIRP o FCC). Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola para el modelo de radio, visite el siguiente sitio web: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/

US-EN/Business+Product+and+Services/Accessories/Two-

Way+Radio+Accessories Interferencia/compatibilidad electromagntica NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a las interferencias electromagnticas (EMI), si no cuentan con la debida proteccin o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Instalaciones Para evitar conflictos de interferencias o de compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todo sitio donde haya letreros que as lo indiquen. Los hospitales y los establecimientos de atencin de salud podran estar usando equipos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 7 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Aviones Cuando est a bordo de un avin, apague el radio cuando se le indique. Si usa el radio, deber hacerlo de conformidad con las regulaciones de la lnea area que correspondan y las instrucciones de la tripulacin. Dispositivos mdicos Marcapasos, desfibriladores u otros dispositivos mdicos implantados Las personas con marcapasos, desfibriladores cardioversores implantables

(DCI) u otros dispositivos mdicos implantados activos (AIMD, por su sigla en ingls) debern:

Consultar con su mdico sobre el riesgo potencial de interferencias de frecuencia de radio transmisores tales como radios porttiles (los dispositivos mdicos con mala proteccin pueden ser ms susceptibles a las interferencias). Apagar el radio inmediatamente, si cree que existe alguna razn para sospechar que se est generando interferencia. Mantener el radio alejado del bolsillo de la camisa o lugar del implante, y guardar o utilizar el radio en el lado opuesto del cuerpo del dispositivo implantado para minimizar la posibilidad de interferencias. Audfonos Algunos radios inalmbricos digitales pueden interferir con ciertos audfonos. En caso de que existan interferencias, puede consultar con el fabricante del audfono para buscar posibles alternativas. Otros dispositivos mdicos Si utiliza cualquier otro dispositivo mdico, consulte con el fabricante del dispositivo para determinar si est protegido adecuadamente contra la energa de RF externa. Su mdico podra ayudarlo a obtener esta informacin. 7 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 8 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Uso de dispositivos de comunicacin mientras se conduce Consulte siempre las leyes y las regulaciones para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Preste toda su atencin a la conduccin y al camino. Use la funcin de manos libres, si est disponible. Salga del camino y estacinese antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si las condiciones de manejo o las regulaciones relacionadas as lo exigen. Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos fuertes de cualquier fuente durante perodos prolongados podra afectar la audicin de manera temporal o permanente. Cuanto ms alto sea el volumen del radio, ms rpido se ver afectada la audicin. En ocasiones, el dao a la audicin provocado por ruidos fuertes es indetectable en un principio y puede tener efecto acumulativo. Para proteger la audicin:

Utilice el volumen ms bajo que necesite para hacer su trabajo. Aumente el volumen solo si se encuentra en un ambiente ruidoso. Reduzca el volumen antes de conectar los auriculares o el audfono. Limite el tiempo durante el cual usa los auriculares o los audfonos a volumen alto. Cuando use el radio sin audfonos o auriculares, no ponga el altavoz del radio directamente en la oreja. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 8 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 9 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento ADVERTENCIA Para vehculos provistos con bolsa de aire (air bag):

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos, a fin de evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO ponga el radio porttil sobre el rea de la bolsa de aire ni sobre la zona de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con gran fuerza. Si se pone un radio en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. 9 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 10 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento (continuacin) ADVERTENCIA Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas

(El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos que pueden contener gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos). Apague el radio antes de ingresar a un rea con una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que sea un tipo de radio porttil clasificado especficamente para el uso en tales reas como Intrnsecamente seguro (por ejemplo, aprobado por Factory Mutual, CSA, UL, ATEX o IECEx). NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras en estas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. Entre los ambientes potencialmente explosivos mencionados anteriormente, se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos; instalaciones de transferencia o almacenamiento de combustible y productos qumicos; y reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como granos, polvos o polvos metlicos. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Detonadores y reas de explosivos Para evitar posibles interferencias con operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de detonadores elctricos, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Respete todos los carteles y las instrucciones. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 10 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 11 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Precauciones sobre el funcionamiento

!

Precaucin Antenas NO use ningn radio porttil que tenga la antena daada. Si una antena daada toca la piel, puede causar una pequea quemadura. Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento Recomendaciones para el uso de las bateras La mayora de los problemas con las bateras surgen debido a su manipulacin inadecuada. Siga estas recomendaciones generales para evitar lesiones y daos. QU SE DEBE HACER Manipule con cuidado las bateras cargadas, especialmente cuando se lleven dentro de un bolsillo, bolso o en algn otro contenedor con objetos metlicos. Cargue la batera con un cargador de bateras aprobado por Motorola. Puede que la carga de la batera en un equipo que no sea de Motorola disminuya el rendimiento y provoque daos a esta. Utilice la batera conforme a su clasificacin de proteccin (IP) contra polvo y agua. Consulte la gua del usuario y la hoja de especificaciones del producto para obtener ms informacin acerca de los entornos operativos pertinentes. 11 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 12 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Precauciones sobre el funcionamiento (continuacin)

!

Precaucin Recomendaciones para el uso de las bateras

(continuacin) QU NO SE DEBE HACER No arroje la batera al fuego. No cambie la batera en un rea designada como Atmsfera peligrosa. Las chispas originadas en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas pueden provocar una explosin o un incendio. No desarme, rompa, perfore, triture ni intente cambiar de ningn otro modo la forma de la batera. No intente secar una batera mojada o hmeda con un electrodomstico o una fuente de calor externa, como un secador de pelo o un horno microondas. Si el rea de contacto de la batera del radio se sumergi en el agua, seque y limpie los contactos de esta antes de colocarla. No permita que materiales conductores como joyas, llaves o cadenas hagan contacto con los terminales expuestos de la batera, ya que dichos materiales pueden cerrar un circuito elctrico o generar cortocircuito y calentarse como consecuencia. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 12 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 13 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Informacin del radio para lugares peligrosos La unidad con aprobacin para lugares peligrosos se refiere a un producto que se ha aprobado para su uso en lugares peligrosos por parte de una agencia de aprobacin (por ejemplo, FM Approvals, CSA, UL, ATEX, o IECEx) y certifica que un producto particular cumple con las normas aplicables de la agencia para lugares peligrosos. Los radios porttiles que se han aprobado para lugares peligrosos tendrn una etiqueta de aprobacin adherida a ellos para identificarlos como aprobados para atmsferas peligrosas especificadas. Esta etiqueta especifica la clase, la divisin o el grupo de los lugares peligrosos junto con el nmero de pieza de la batera que se debe usar con el radio aprobado. Precauciones sobre el funcionamiento del equipo del radio en lugares peligrosos

!

Precaucin NO haga funcionar el equipo para comunicaciones de radio en atmsferas peligrosas, a menos que se trate de un tipo especialmente calificado (por ejemplo, aprobado por FM, UL, CSA, ATEX o IECEx). El uso de una unidad no aprobada puede provocar una situacin poco segura. NO haga funcionar la unidad de radio que se ha aprobado para el uso en lugares peligrosos si presenta daos fsicos (por ejemplo, una carcasa rota). Esto podra provocar una situacin poco segura. NO reemplace ni cargue las bateras en una atmsfera peligrosa. Mientras se instalan o se quitan las bateras, pueden producirse chispas en el contacto. NO utilice el radio en lugares peligrosos distintos a los que especifica la clasificacin permitida. 13 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 14 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Los radios se deben enviar desde una instalacin de fabricacin de Motorola con el diseo y la etiqueta que indique que estn aprobados para lugares peligrosos

(aprobado por FM, UL, CSA, ATEX, IECEx). Una vez que se hayan enviado los radios a terreno, no se actualizarn para alcanzar la capacidad ni se los etiquetar. Las modificaciones cambian la configuracin del diseo calificado y aprobado del hardware de la unidad. Solo el fabricante del producto original puede realizar modificaciones. Para obtener ms informacin acerca de las advertencias e instrucciones para el uso seguro de los radios en lugares peligrosos, consulte el manual de seguridad para la clasificacin de lugares peligrosos. Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 14 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 15 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Notas 15 Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 16 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Notas Espaol

(Latinoamrica) 16 6881095C98_SafetyP.book Page 17 Wednesday, March 4, 2015 2:35 PM Notas 17 Espaol

(Latinoamrica)

 

 

APX8000_M3_FrontCover.fm Page 1 Friday, April 3, 2015 4:32 PM APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX 8000 MODEL 3 USER GUIDE BETA BETA QR-Card.fm Page 1 Thursday, April 16, 2015 2:43 PM m ASTRO APX 8000 Series Digital Portable Radios Quick Reference Card RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Radio Controls Top (Orange) Button __________ Microphone Accessory Connector Home Button Keypad 3-Position A/B/C Switch __________ 2-Position Concentric Switch __________ Main Display Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button 16-Position Select Knob __________ On/Off/Volume Control Knob Top Side (Select) Button __________ PTT Button Side Button 1 __________ Side Button 2 __________ Radio On/Off Antenna Top Display Microphone Main Speaker Bluetooth Pairing Indicator Battery On On/Off/Volume knob clockwise. Off On/Off/Volume knob counterclockwise. Zones and Channels Receiving and Transmitting 1 Select zone/channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. OR Press and hold Volume Set button. OR Press Monitor button and listen for activity. 3 Adjust volume, if necessary. 4 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive. Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press and hold the Emergency button*. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone/channel. Radio sounds a short, medium-pitched tone, and the LED blinks red momentarily. 3 When acknowledgment is received, you hear four beeps; alarm ends; and radio exits emergency.

* Default emergency button press timer is set to 1 second. This timer is programmable, see page 68 in the user guide for details. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. 4-Way Navigation Button Zone Zone switch to desired zone. Channel Channel switch to desired channel. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2015 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. 04/15 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A.

*PMLN7287A*

PMLN7287A-AA English BETA QR-Card.fm Page 2 Thursday, April 16, 2015 2:43 PM Sending an Emergency Call 1 Press the Emergency button. 2 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to end call. 4 Press and hold Emergency button to exit emergency. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Call 1 Press the Emergency button. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. 3 Silent emergency continues until you:

Press and hold the Emergency button to exit emergency state. OR Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Display Status Icons u t 8 Blinks when the battery is low. Transmitting a call or data. Receiving a call or data. English v O M HOR . i j k The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site

(trunking only). Direct radio to radio communication or connected through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater This channel is being monitored. L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-Two Channel during scan. The vote scan feature is enabled. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Menu Navigation

< or > to Menu Entry. m l G n o b a On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = feature enabled, and signal available. Off = feature disabled. Blinking = feature enabled, but signal unavailable. On = User is currently associated with Off = User is currently not associated the radio. with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. Bluetooth is ready. Bluetooth is connected to the device. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represent the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal.

{, |, or } directly below Menu Entry to select. H to exit. U or D to scroll through sub-list.

{, |, or } directly below Menu Entry to select. BETA Contents Documentation Copyrights...........15 Declaration of Conformity.........................8 Disclaimer.......................................16 Important Safety Information........10 Software Version............................11 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)....................................................11 Consignes de scurit importantes.................................12 Version logicielle........................... 13 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada)....................................................13 Computer Software Copyrights....14 Getting Started...............................17 How to Use This Guide..................................17 Notations Used in This Manual......................17 Additional Performance Enhancement.......... 18 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.................18 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR).... 18 CrossTalk Prevention..........................18 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID).........18 SecureNet...........................................18 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements......................18 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................19 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......20 Charging the Battery......................................20 Attaching the Battery..................................... 20 English C o n t e n t s 1 BETA Attaching the Antenna................................... 21 Removing and Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover...................................... 22 Using the Carry Holder.................................. 23 Turning On the Radio.................................... 25 Adjusting the Volume.....................................26 Identifying Radio Controls............27 Radio Parts and Controls...............................27 Programmable Features................................28 Assignable Radio Functions............... 29 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions....................................... 32 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.....33 Menu Select Buttons...........................33 Home Button.......................................33 4-Way Navigation Button.................... 34 Data Feature Button............................34 Keypad...........................................................34 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..............................................34 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..............................................36 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode..............................................37 s t n e t n o C 2 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode..............................................38 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................39 Identifying Status Indicators.........40 Status Icons...................................................40 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.....44 TMS Status Icons................................45 TMS Menu Options.............................46 Call Type Icons..............................................46 LED Indicator.................................................47 Intelligent Lighting Indicators......................... 48 Alert Tones.................................................... 49 Phone Call Displays and Alerts..................... 54 General Radio Operation...............56 Selecting a Zone............................................56 Selecting a Radio Channel............................ 57 Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button....................................................... 57 Mode Select Feature..................................... 58 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey...........................................58 BETA Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button............................................ 59 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 59 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call................................59 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)...........60 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).....61 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................61 Making a Talkgroup Call..................... 62 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 62 Making an Enhanced Private Call

(Trunking Only).............................. 63 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 64 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button...................................... 65 Monitor Feature............................................. 65 Monitoring a Channel..........................66 Monitoring Conventional Mode........... 66 Advanced Features........................68 Advanced Call Features................................ 68 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)........................ 68 Talkgroup Call Feature

(Conventional Operation Only)...... 69 Sending a Status Call......................... 70 Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only).............................................. 70 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....72 Contacts.........................................................74 Making a Private Call from Contacts...75 Adding a New Contact Entry...............76 Deleting a Contact Entry.....................77 Adding a Contact to a Call List............77 Removing a Contact from a Call List................................................. 78 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................... 78 Viewing Details of a Contact...............80 Scan Lists...................................................... 80 Viewing a Scan List.............................80 Editing the Scan List........................... 80 Changing the Scan List Status............81 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status.............................................82 Scan...............................................................83 Turning Scan On or Off.......................83 C o n t e n t s 3 English BETA Making a Dynamic Priority Change

(Conventional Scan Only)..............83 Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 83 Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 84 Call Alert Paging............................................84 Receiving a Call Alert Page................ 84 Sending a Call Alert Page...................85 Emergency Operation....................................86 Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 87 Sending an Emergency Call

(Trunking Only).............................. 88 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call............................. 88 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm.... 89 Change of Channels during Emergency.....................................89 Emergency Keep-Alive Feature..........90 Fireground (Conventional Only).....................90 Entering Fireground Zone Channel.....91 Responding to Evacuation Indicator... 92 Tactical Public Safety (TPS)

(Conventional Only)..................................92 Using TPS Normal Transmission........92 Using TPS Emergency Transmission................................. 92 Man Down......................................................93 Pre-Alert Timer....................................95 Post-Alert Timer..................................95 Radio Alerts When Man Down Feature is Triggered...................... 95 Triggering Emergency.........................95 Radio Alerts When Man Down Enhanced is Triggered...................96 Exiting Man Down Feature..................96 Re-Initiating Man Down.......................97 Testing the Man Down Feature...........97 Automatic Registration Service (ARS)...........97 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode..............................................98 User Login Feature............................. 98 Text Messaging Service (TMS)................... 100 Accessing the Messaging Features..101 Composing and Sending a New Text Message.............................. 102 Sending a Quick Text Message........103 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message............... 104 ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution..111 System Setup for ASTRO Advanced Messaging Solution.... 112 Two-Factor Authentication................112 Sending a Query...............................115 Receiving a Query............................ 116 Secure Operations.......................................117 s t n e t n o C 4 English BETA Selecting Secure Transmissions.......117 Selecting Clear Transmissions......... 117 Managing Encryption........................ 118 Security........................................................123 Radio Lock........................................123 Radio Stun and Kill...................................... 125 Radio Stun........................................ 125 Radio Kill...........................................126 Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System....................127 GPS Operation..................................128 GPS Performance Enhancement......129 The Outdoor Location Feature

(Using GPS).................................129 Military Grid Reference System

(MGRS) Coordinates................... 130 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature........................................ 130 Saving a Waypoint............................131 Viewing a Saved Waypoint............... 131 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint......... 132 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint......................................133 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....134 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...........134 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint.. 135 Location Feature in Emergency Mode............................................135 Trunking System Controls........................... 136 Operating in Failsoft System.............136 Out-of-Range Radio..........................136 Site Trunking Feature....................... 136 Locking and Unlocking a Site............136 Site Display and Search Button........ 137 Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth-........ 138 Turning On Bluetooth .......................138 Turning Off the Bluetooth..................139 Re-Pair Timer....................................139 Bluetooth Drop Timer........................140 Pairing with Low Frequency-

Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-

MPP) Feature.............................. 141 Radio Indications of Lost Bluetooth Connection...................................143 Standard Pairing Feature..................143 PIN Authentication in Pairing............ 146 Turning On the Bluetooth Audio

(Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset)..................149 Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio

(Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio)..................150 C o n t e n t s 5 English BETA Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device....... 150 Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information.......................150 Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information...................................151 Editing the Bluetooth Friendly Name........................................... 152 Over-the-Air Programming (POP 25, ASTRO 25, ASTRO Conventional and Wi-Fi)...................................................... 153 Responding to the Notification of Upgrade....................................... 153 Voice Announcement...................................154 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..............155 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site...............................................155 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry.................. 156 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites.............................................157 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites............................. 158 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site....................................158 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry....... 159 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites.............................................160 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites............................. 160 Wi-Fi............................................................ 161 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.....................161 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............... 161 Utilities......................................................... 162 Viewing Recent Calls........................162 Using the Flip Display....................... 163 Selecting a Basic Zone Bank............163 Selecting an Enhanced Zone Bank.. 164 Selecting the Power Level................ 164 Selecting a Radio Profile...................165 Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias............................................. 166 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 166 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad and Controls................................ 166 Turning the Controls and Keypad Buttons Tones On or Off..............167 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...........167 Using the Time-Out Timer.................167 Time and Date Setup........................168 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features......................169 s t n e t n o C 6 English BETA Using the PL Defeat Feature............ 170 Digital PTT ID Support......................170 Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)............................................ 170 Transmit Inhibit................................. 171 IMPRES Battery Annunciator............172 General Radio Information................173 Helpful Tips.................................. 177 Radio Care...................................................177 Cleaning Your Radio.........................178 Proper Ways to Handle the Radio.... 178 Radio Service and Repair.................179 Battery Care.................................................179 Battery Charge Status.......................179 Battery Recycling and Disposal........ 181 Accessories..................................182 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range..................... 183 Special Channel Assignments.....................183 Emergency Channel......................... 183 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 183 Operating Frequency Requirements............183 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............186 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources............................186 C o n t e n t s Glossary........................................187 Limited Warranty..........................193 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 193 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 193 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 194 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................194 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.194 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................195 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 195 VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................197 VIII. For Australia Only:................................197 7 English BETA Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX 8000 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 8 English BETA Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 9 English BETA This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. n o i t a m r o n f I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 10 English BETA Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R14.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 173 to determine your radio software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of the Industry Canada rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. S o f t w a r e V e r s o n i 11 English BETA les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes, des batteries et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i 12 English BETA Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R14.00.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et RSS 210 du rglement d'Industrie Canada selon les conditions numres ci-dessous:

Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. V e r s o n i l i o g c e i l l e 13 English BETA Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C 14 English BETA Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. D o c u m e n t a t i o n C o p y r i g h t s 15 English BETA Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. i r e m a c s D i l 16 English BETA Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX Portables. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. Warning An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. Caution An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in G e t t i n g S a r t t e d damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. Note An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Phon Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. 17 English BETA Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-

Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 English BETA G e t t i n g S a r t t e d single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. Note User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator for the correct radio settings, if the radio is to be operated in extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C), to ensure proper top and front display operation. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Note Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 19 English BETA Attaching the Battery If your radio is preprogrammed with volatile-key retention, the encryption keys are retained for approximately 30 seconds after battery removal. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. You can view the status of the IMPRES battery if the radio is using an IMPRES battery. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 172 for more information. 1 Slide the battery into the radio frame until the side latches click into place. Preparing Your Radio for Use Charging the Battery Warning To avoid a possible explosion:

Do not replace the battery in any area labeled hazardous atmosphere. Do not discard batteries in a fire. The Motorola-approved battery shipped with your radio is uncharged. Prior to using a new battery, charge it for a minimum of 16 hours to ensure optimum capacity and performance. For a list of Motorola-authorized batteries and chargers available for use with your radio, see Accessories on page 182. Note When charging a battery attached to a radio, turn the radio off to ensure a full charge. To charge the battery, place the battery (with or without the radio) in a Motorola-approved charger. The LED on the charger indicates the charging progress; see the charger user guide. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 20 English BETA P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 2 To remove the battery, squeeze the release at the bottom of the battery until the latches battery releases from the radio and remove the battery from the radio. Note When removing the battery, ensure that the radio is turned off. Attaching the Antenna Ensure the radio is turned off before attaching the antenna. 1 Set the antenna in its receptacle. 2 Turn the antenna clockwise to attach to the radio. 21 English ABETA Removing and Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover The accessory connector is on the antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect accessories to the radio. Note To prevent damage to the connector, shield it with the connector cover when not in use. 1 To remove the accessory connector cover, rotate the thumbscrew disengages from the radio. counterclockwise until it 3 To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. Note When removing the antenna, ensure that the radio is turned off. Note If the thumbscrew is too tight, use an Allen wrench at to loosen it first. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 22 English BETA Using the Carry Holder 1 Position the radio within the carry holder with the main speaker facing outward. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 2 Slide the radio down into the carry holder until it clicks in place. 23 English 2 Rotate and lift the connector cover to disengage it from the radio. 3 To attach the accessory connector cover, insert of the cover into the slot above the hooked end the connector. 4 Press downward on the covers top to seat it in the slot. 5 Once in place, tighten by rotating the thumbscrew clockwise by hand. CBABETA 3 To remove the radio from the carry holder, place the tip of your fingers on the ledge of the carry holder. 4 Push at the bottom of the radio until the radio is released from it. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 24 English BETA P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f Turning On the Radio 1 Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise until you hear a click. o r U s e If the power-up test is successful, you see a splash screen on the radio display, followed by the Home screen. If the power-up test is unsuccessful, you see Error XX/YY (XX/YY is an alphanumeric code). Note If the radio fails to power-up after repeating a few times, record the Error XX/YY code and contact your dealer. 25 English BETA 1 To increase the volume, rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise. 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. 2 To turn off the radio, rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob counterclockwise until you hear a click. e s U r o f i o d a R Adjusting the Volume Ensure the radio is power on and the main speaker is pointed towards you for increased loudness and intelligibility, especially in areas with loud background noises. r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 26 English ABETA Identifying Radio Controls Radio Parts and Controls I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 1 2 3 4 5 Antenna LED Top (Orange) Button[1]

Microphone Accessory Connector 27 English 101112131498123456715161718198202122232425BETA Home Button 6 4Way Navigation Button 7 Battery Latch 8 Keypad 9 10 Data Feature Button 11 Menu Select Buttons 12 Main Display 13 14 15 On/Off/Volume Control Knob 16 17 18 19 20 21 Top Side (Select) Button[1]

Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Side Button 1[1]

Side Button 2[1]

Battery Bluetooth Pairing Location Indicator 2Position Concentric Switch[1]

3Position A/B/C Switch[1]

22 Main Speaker 23 Microphone 24 Top Display 16Position Select Knob[1]

25 Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/

groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Long press Pressing and holding for the Pressing and releasing rapidly. preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 28 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. English BETA Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions Bluetooth On/Off Allows you to turn on/off the Bluetooth Configuration Bluetooth Audio Reroute Bluetooth Headset PTT Bluetooth Data Devices Bluetooth Clear All Pairing Bluetooth Inquiry On/Off Bluetooth. Allows you to access to the Bluetooth menu. Allows you to toggle the audio route between radio speaker or Remote Speaker Microphone and Bluetooth headset. Keys up the Bluetooth Headset microphone. Keys up the Bluetooth data devices. Allows you to clear all pairing information for Bluetooth. This is accessed by a long press of the Bluetooth On/Off Button. Enables Bluetooth Search feature. Bluetooth Discoverable On/Off Call Alert Call Response Channel Contacts Dynamic ID

(Conventional Only) Dynamic Priority

(Conventional Only) Emergency Enables Bluetooth visibility. This is accessed by a long press of the Bluetooth Inquiry On/Off Button. Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Allows you to answer a private call. Selects a channel. Selects the Contacts menu. Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 29 English BETA Information Internet Protocol Address Location Displays the information of the radio. Display the Internet Protocol

(IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Determines the current location

(latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Man Down Clear Clears the alarm of Man Down l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 30 English Message Mode Select mode which was triggered when your radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and a motion sensitivity level. Enters the current message list. Long-press programs a button with the current zone and channel of the radio; once programmed, the short-press of that button changes the radio Monitor

(Conventional Only) Multiple Private Line

(Conventional Only) Nuisance Delete One Touch 1 4 Phone zone channel to the programmed zone and channel. Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. BETA Private Call

(Trunking Only) Private Line Defeat

(Conventional Only) Query Radio Profiles Recent Calls Rekey Request Repeater Access Button (RAB)

(Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Overrides any coded squelch

(DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Launches a list of predefined short text messages only after successfully logged in the two-

Factor Authentification. Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Notifies the dispatcher you want a new encryption key. Allows user to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request

(Trunking Only) Request-To-Talk

(Conventional Only) Scan Scan List Programming Secure Transmission Select

(Conventional and Trunking) Selective Call

(Conventional Only) Site Display/

Search (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Notifies the dispatcher you want to send a voice call. Toggles scan on or off. Selects the scan list for editing

(by long press on the Scan button). Toggles the Secure Transmission On or Off when the Secure/Clear Strapping fields is set to Select for the current channel and when the radio is model/option capable. Calls an assigned radio. Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 31 English BETA Site Lock/Unlock

(Trunking Only) Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Talkaround/Direct

(Conventional Only) Talkgroup

(Conventional Only) Text Messaging Service (TMS) TMS Quick Text User Zone Select Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Locks onto a specific site. Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Selects the text messaging menu. Selects a predefined message. Automatically registers with the server. Allows selection from a list of zones. Basic Zone Bank Provides access from up to 6 zones by toggling between 2 banks of 3 zones, one group of 3 (A, B and C) to a second group of 3 zones (D, E and F). Provides access from up to 75 zones by toggling between 25 banks (A, B ... X or Y) of 3 zones. Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Enhanced Zone Bank Wi-Fi Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Keypad/Controls Lock Light/Flip TX Power Level Voice Announcement Locks or unlocks the keypad, programmable buttons, switches or rotary knobs. Press the button to toggle the display backlight on or off;

press and hold the button to reverse the content of the top display. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 32 English BETA Voice Mute Volume Set Tone Channel the user has just assigned. Toggles voice mute on or off. Sets the volume set tone. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button. Use the Menu Select and Navigation buttons. A B C D E Softkeys Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button 4Way Navigation Button Home Button Menu Select Buttons Note Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Use the Menu Select button to access the menu entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Home Button button returns you to the Home Pressing the

(default) screen. In most cases, this is the current button is mode. For selected radio features, the 33 English BCDEABETA also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 6 8

; @ _ 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

7 9

-

10

*

11

#

12

&

13

$

14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i A B C 34 English BETA 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 D 2 E 3 F 4 5 6 7 G H J K M N I L O I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l P T U W X Q R S V Y Z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 35 English BETA Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 8 6

; @ _ 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

7 9

-

10

*

11

#

12

&

13

$

14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) a d g j b e h k m n p t w q u x c f i l o r v y s z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 36 English BETA Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 8 7

@ _ 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

6

;

9

-

10

*

11

#

12

&

13

$

14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 37 English BETA Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 A D B E C F 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Not applicable Not applicable l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 38 English BETA Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 61 for more information. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l on the side of the radio serves two The PTT button basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. 39 English ABETA Identifying Status Indicators Status Icons The 130 x 130 pixel front liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The top two display rows contain color icons that indicate radio operating conditions. Selected icons are also shown on the first row of the 112 x 32 pixel top monochrome display screen of your radio. The following icons are for the front display screen unless indicated otherwise. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Top Display:

Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i Top Display:

40 English Top Display:

Top Display:

Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Battery For IMPRES battery operation only the icon shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. For all battery operation the icon blinks when the battery is low. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. Roaming The radio has roamed to and is currently registered to a foreign system. BETA Top Display:

Top Display:

Top Display:

Direct On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication

(during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. Power Level L Radio is set at Low power. H Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. or Top Display:

or Top Display:

Top Display:

41 English BETA Top Display:

Top Display:

Top Display:

or or Top Display:

or or View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady View mode Blinking Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Basic Zone Bank 1 A Radio is in Zone 1. B Radio is in Zone 2. C Radio is in Zone 3. Basic Zone Bank 2 D Radio is in Zone 4. E Radio is in Zone 5. F Radio is in Zone 6. Top Display:

,

, until or Top Display:

Enhanced Zone Bank A Contains Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3, B Contains Zone 4, Zone 5 and Zone 6, C Contains Zone 7, Zone 8 and Zone 9, until X Contains Zone 70, Zone 71 and Zone 72, Y Contains Zone 73, Zone 74 and Zone 75. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 42 English BETA AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is available. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the radio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. 43 English BETA Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Bluetooth On Bluetooth is on and ready for Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth is currently connected to the external Bluetooth device. Top Display:

Top Display:

The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represents the signal strength of the Wi-

Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. Status icons and menu options shown s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 44 English BETA here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 100 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 45 English BETA The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. Menu Option No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes Description/Function Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. TMS Menu Options Call Type Icons Menu Option Back Clr Del Edit Exit Description/Function Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes all messages. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 46 English BETA Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. Incoming emergency call. LED Indicator The LED indicator your radio. shows the operational status of I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Solid red Blinking red Double blinking red Rapidly blinking red Solid yellow

(Conventional Only) Radio is transmitting. Radio is transmitting at low battery condition. Radio is in Emergency Mode. Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Channel is busy. 47 English ABETA Blinking yellow Solid green Blinking green Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in Rapidly blinking green the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Note No LED indication when the radio receives a clear (non-secured) transmission in trunking Mode. LED indication can be preprogramed by qualified technician to be permanently disabled. Consult your dealer for further details if you want to disable it. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the backlight of the top display screen, and adds a color bar to the main display screen to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange Notification When Emergency Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 48 English BETA Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates the Man Down Post-Alert timer. The radio initiates Fireground Evacuation alarm. The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio lost GPS signal or GPS function fails. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 49 English BETA Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. When radio initiates Man Down mode. Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Man Down Entry Time-Out Timer Timed Out After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Lack of Voice PTT Time out When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. Out of Range Invalid Mode voice for 5 seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your radio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. You Hear Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Long, Low-

Pitched Tone s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 50 English BETA You Hear A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medium-

Pitched Tone Long, Medium-

Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-

Pitched Tones Tone Name Busy Heard When system is busy. When entering the emergency state. When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm /Call Entry Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back Keyfail Console Acknowledge When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 51 English BETA You Hear Two Short, Medium-

Pitched Tones Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Gurgle Tone Name Received Individual Call Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Over-the-Air Programming request Heard When Call Alert or Private Call is received. When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When the radio receives an over-the-air programming request. Low-Battery Chirp When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS signal is lost or when GPS fails. Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for accepting its transmissions. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 52 English BETA You Hear Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp Incremental-

Pitched Tone Decremental-

Pitched Tone A Group of Very High-

Pitched Tones Unique Low-

High Tone Unique High-

Low Tone Tone Name New Message Heard When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t Bluetooth Paired Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth Unpaired Bluetooth Disconnected Man Down Continuous Tone Critical Man Down Continuous Tone Enhanced Zone Bank Up When Bluetooth accessory is paired with the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is connected to the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is unpaired from the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is disconnected from the radio. When radio is in Man Down mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. When radio is in Man Down Enhanced mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. When EZB Up button is pressed to scroll the Enhance Zone Bank up. Enhanced Zone Bank Down When EZB Down button is pressed to scroll the Enhance Zone Bank down. t u s I n d c a i t o r s 53 English BETA Phone Call Displays and Alerts The following phone call displays and alerts appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear A Long Tone You See No phone Phone busy Notes When You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. The phone system is busy. Press Press Home screen. A Busy Tone Phone busy No acknowledge When a channel is not available. The call is not acknowledged. A High- Pitched Tone When you release the PTT button. to hang up. The radio returns to the to exit the phone mode and try your call later. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. to hang up. The radio returns to the Press Home screen. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. Note You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 54 English BETA If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 55 English BETA General Radio Operation Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. The following methods are options on how to select a radio zone. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone via the preprogrammed Zone (3-

Position A/B/C) switch:

a) Move the preprogrammed Zone (3-Position A/B/C) switch to the position of the required zone. If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat this step. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the displayed zone. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 56 English Select a zone via the radio menu Zone:

a) b) or to Zone and press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat this step. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the displayed zone. d) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a zone via the radio menu ZnUp or ZnDn:

or to ZnUp or ZnDn. a) b) Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below ZnUp or ZnDn until the required zone appears. Positions of ZnUp and ZnDn on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Read carefully before you press. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. BETA Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs. The following methods are options on how to select a radio channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel via the preprogrammed 16 Position Select Knob to the desired channel. a) Rotate the preprogrammed 16Position Select Knob to the desired channel. b) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel via the radio menu Chan:

or to Chan. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. or c) to the required channel or use the keypad to enter the channel number. If the channel number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat this step. d) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. e) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel via the radio menu Channel Up or Channel Down:

a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below to ChUp or ChDn. or ChUp or ChDn. Positions of ChUp and ChDn on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Read carefully before you press. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone and channel. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of the channel. If the name matches, your radio prompts the first found matched channel name. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

57 English BETA Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. or to CSrh and press the Menu Select button directly below CSrh. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below CSrh once the entry is done. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. The display shows Searching. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changed its transmission to the selected channel. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found. Repeat step 2 to search n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 58 English again; or press below Exit to exit. or the Menu Select button directly Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:

Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) Note Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. BETA 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1 MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button You can save the frequent used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Note Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 59 English BETA When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio triggers for your attention with one of the following scenarios depending on the system your radio is configured:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 62 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 60 English The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the call received icon blinks. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. Press theCall Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. BETA 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 1 Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 Press or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 62 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen and the bar turns green.The display shows Phone Call and the call received icon blinks. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a 3 Press or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 64 for details on making a Telephone Call. t i o n Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switch. The 16-Position Select Channel Knob. A preprogrammed One Touch Call button. The Contacts list (see Viewing Details of a Contact on page 80). Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will 61 English BETA hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Turn the 16-Position Select Channel Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 62 English BETA Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or Use the keypad to enter the required ID. to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. The display shows Calling... <Number>. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert Page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 85 for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 63 English BETA or Use the keypad to enter the required ID. to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. The display shows Calling... <Number>. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or Use the keypad to enter the required phone to the required phone number. number. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

4 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 64 English BETA 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. See Phone Call Displays and Alerts on page 54 for more information if your call is NOT answered. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to Dir and press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. 65 English BETA Monitoring a Channel The following methods are options on how to monitor a channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Monitoring a Channel with Volume Set button. a) Select the desired zone and channel. b) Press and hold the Volume Set button to hear the volume set tone. c) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. d) Release the Volume Set button. e) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. f) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). Monitoring a Channel with Monitor button. a) Press the preprogrammed Monitor button. b) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. c) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. d) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display when you monitor a channel via the preprogrammed Monitor button. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 66 English Monitoring a Channel via the selected zone channel. a) Select the desired zone and channel. b) Listen for a transmission. c) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. d) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. e) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). Monitoring Conventional Mode Your radio may be preprogrammed to receive Private-

Line (PL) calls. 1 Momentarily press the Monitor button to listen for activity. The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display. 2 Press and hold the Monitor button to set continuous monitor operation. The duration of the button press is programmable. 3 Press the Monitor button again, or the PTT button, to return to the original squelch setting. BETA If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 67 English BETA Advanced Features Advanced Call Features Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Selective Call 1 Perform one of the following actions:

This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, the radio initiates for your attention with one of the following indication scenario:

You hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow to indicate the transmitting radio is still sending signal. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. The LED blinks solid green once to indicate the transmitting radio is pending to receive signal. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. BETA or Use the keypad to enter the required ID. to the required ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 117 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

to Preset for the preset or preprogrammed Talkgroup. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or Use the keypad to enter the number of the to the required Talkgroup. corresponding Talkgroup in the list. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. 69 English BETA Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to Sts and press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received . The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. BETA Note If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a Gurgle tone and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows Reprgrm rqst and Please wait. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories:

to cancel and Select Enabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 71 English BETA Select Disabled Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) Note Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store the frequent used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>.[2]

3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen.[2]

If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 2 # indicates number of the channel on the 16-Position Switch which are numbered from 1 to 16. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English BETA Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 4 5 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Select Chan screen. or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Channel updated. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from Channel Name The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 or to Channel Name then press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a blinking cursor on the Channel Name screen. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit the channel name. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Srch once the entry is done to initiate searching. 73 English BETA You can cancel this operation at this step by pressing the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to Search Options screen. The display shows Searching.... Once found, the display shows Channel updated. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid entry. If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found. Repeat from step 4 or 5 to search again. to return to the Home screen. 6 Press Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>+Blank. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context

(conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English BETA Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 2 or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. or to scroll through the available IDs for the selected subscriber alias and proceed to step 6. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 5 or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to select the call type. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 75 English BETA The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Adding a New Contact Entry 5 6 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [New Contact] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Edit name and a blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have entered the name. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. or to [Add Number] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Edit Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 7 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions per the information you need to add to current name:

to Type 1 and press the Menu Select or button directly below Edit. or to the required mode and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. BETA Repeat Steps 6 through 7 to enter or edit the exisitng system IDs. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to add a new number. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Del and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Delete <Entry> confirm?. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Add to CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required Call List and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add to the Call List. or to Cncl to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. 77 English BETA The display shows momentary Please wait before showing <Entry> added to Call List, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Removing a Contact from a Call List 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Rm frm CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Remove <Entry> frm Call List?. Editing an Entry Alias 1 2 3 4 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to remove the entry from the Call List, or No to cancel and return to the main display of Contacts. The display shows momentary Please wait before showing <Entry> removed from Call List, confirming the removal of the contact from the list. 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English BETA 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID Editing a Call Type 1 2 3 4 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 1 2 3 4 5 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 79 English BETA 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Viewing Details of a Contact 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to view and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows all the numbers associated with the entry. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/ groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Please refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List 1 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. 2 or 3 Press the Home screen. to view the members on the list. to exit the current display and return to Editing the Scan List This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

BETA Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position. or to ScnL then press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 2 or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. to the desired channel. or Use the keypad to enter the desired channel Use the 16-Position Select knob to select the name. channel. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 82 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position. The display shows the programming mode icon and the first list member. 81 English BETA 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. Use the 16-Position Select knob to select another scan list member. 5 Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-

priority channels. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. BETA Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to toggle Scan On or Scan Off to initiate or stop scan. Turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan and press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Making a Dynamic Priority Change via the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button:

a) When the radio locks onto the channel designated as the new Priority-Two channel, press the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. 83 English BETA This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Call Alert Paging When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Nuisance Delete button. or to Nuis and press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, or when you press the PTT button. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. BETA See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 62 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 62 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page The following methods are options on how to send a call alert page. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Note If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page via the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Sending a call alert page via the radio menu Page:

or to Page. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to view the required ID, to the required ID, or use the keypad to enter the required ID. or d) Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. 85 English BETA If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu Call:

or to Call. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. or c) to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. d) To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes. To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No. The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen of Contacts. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Top (Orange) button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Each channel can only assigned one of the Emergency modes above. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel. BETA Note To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-

Revert The radio sends emergency alarm and/or make emergency call on the current selected channel. The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send alarm and/or make emergency call. The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency talkgroup to send alarm and/or make emergency call. Non-Tactical/

Revert for Conventional system Non-Tactical/

Revert for Trunking system Man Down is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature on the condition the Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. See Man Down on page 93 for details. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Note Emergency button press timer by default is set to 1 second. This timer is programmable from 0 6 seconds by a qualified technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short medium-

pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. The radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate that the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 87 English BETA When you receive the dispatchers acknowledgment, the display shows Ack received. Four tones sound, the alarm ends, and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows No acknowledge. The alarm ends when the timer expires and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short medium-

pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English BETA You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgement. The display shows No acknowledge. You press the PTT button while in the Emergency Alarm mode. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

You press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode. Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. Change of Channels during Emergency For ALL Emergency transmissions, when changing channels:

If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 89 English BETA Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is not preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. Emergency Keep-Alive Feature This feature, when enabled, prevents the radio from being turned off via the On/Off Control Knob when the radio is in the Emergency state. Note The radio only exits the Emergency state using one of the ways mentioned in the previous sections. See Sending an Emergency Alarm on page 87, Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) on page 88, Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call on page 88, or Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm on page 89. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English Fireground (Conventional Only) Incident Management Software The portable Fireground Communications System is designed for deployment at an incident scene. It consists of five central components:

Your APX portable radios Command Terminal Radio Frequency (RF) Modem DVRS (Optional) These components provide on-scene and inbuilding radio coverage, and enhanced personnel accountability and monitoring. The radio helps to indicate your presence on the scene if it is in the range of the Incident Commander command terminal. Each Fireground Communication System radio automatically reports your radio ID on the commander mobile command terminal. Your name, riding position and sector are all can be configured to be seen at the Commanders command terminal. If you have a critical situation, you can press the Emergency button which activates an alarm on the BETA Incident Management Software at the command terminal. The Fireground signals transmission is always exchanging data between your radio and the RF Modem and command terminal. The status of your radio includes:

Powering up or down the radio Automatic response to Polling Response to Evacuation commands Pressing the PTT button to make voice transmission Sending an Emergency Alarm and Call Entering Fireground Zone Channel 1 Upon powering up, perform one of the following actions:

If the Fireground Zone Channel is set as default, you hear gurgle tone and the home screen. You are in Fireground zone channel. If the Fireground Zone Channel is set as default, but you hear a short, low-pitched tone, the display shows Reg failed to indicate that the command terminal does not respond to Fireground Zone Channel. Get a qualified technician for assistance. If your home channel is not Fireground Zone Channel, toggle or change the radio zone channel to Fireground Zone Channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold the preprogrammed Volume Set button to hear the volume set tone. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. Release the Volume Set button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s At the desired Fireground zone and channel, press the preprogrammed Monitor button and listen for activity. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. If your radio is working in Fireground Zone Channel, proceed to next step. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red while transmitting. Talk into the microphone clearly if needed. 5 Release the PTT button to receive. 91 English BETA You hear a Transmit End Tone. Responding to Evacuation Indicator When Incident Commander triggers Evacuation signal from his command terminal, the RF Modem updates everyone in the Fireground Communication System with the order to evacuate the incident site. Your radio sounds the Evacuation Tone at the profile maximum alert tone volume level. The display shows EVACUATE. Perform one of the following actions:

Move the Volume Control Knob to adjust the volume of the Evacuation Tone from full volume. Perform any action on the radio other than volume adjustments to cancel the evacuation indications and update the command terminal. If preprogrammed with Manual Acknowledgement of Evacuation Command, pressing the PTT button shall cancel the indications and acknowledge the command terminal. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Tactical Public Safety (TPS) (Conventional Only) TPS enabled the user of a group to identify a transmission starts and ends clearly by displaying the caller name or ID on the radio display. Using TPS Normal Transmission At TPS Zone Channel, perform one of the following actions:

Press PTT button to transmit. Talk clearly into the microphone. Release PTT button to listen. Receive and listen to call, the radio displays the callers name or ID. Using TPS Emergency Transmission The following are two important alert tones designed for this feature. Emergency Beacon During Emergency if the TPS radio user pushes the Emergency button, the radio sounds a Beacon at the maximum volume of the radio at radios internal speaker and it is not adjustable. This beacon goes to BETA Emergency Call De-Key Sidetone silent when user presses the PTT button for voice transmission. The radio sounds an alert tone to remind radio user that the Emergency Mode is still active after user releases the PTT button for an Emergency call transmission. The volume of loudness depends on the maximum tone at your radio profile. 1 Press the Emergency button to enter Emergency Mode. You hear Emergency Beacon. 2 Press PTT button to make Emergency Call. 3 Release to listen. You hear Emergency Call De-Key Sidetone. After a short pause, you hear Emergency Beacon. 4 Long press Emergency button to exit Emergency mode and cancel Emergency Beacon. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Man Down Man Down condition is determined based upon the radio tilt angle or a combination of radio tilt angle and the lack of radio motion. Man Down feature is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature if Emergency has been programmed in your radio. Note This feature could be preprogrammed for all channels that support Emergency feature or could be preprogrammed specifically to a zone and channel which has Emergency feature. Consult your agent or qualified technician for more details. Your radio automatically activates Emergency Alarm or Call when the radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and radio motion below the motion sensitivity level, depending upon how the radio is programmed. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. 93 English BETA Note It is recommended that an Emergency button is preprogrammed in order to allow the user to exit the emergency condition. The Man Down feature provides a Clear function to the user. After a Man Down condition has been detected, the user can press a preprogrammed Clear button or preprogrammed Menu Select button to cancel the Man Down condition. The radio remains in the Man Down state without triggering an emergency condition until the radio is moved out of the Man Down state, at which point Man Down functionality resumes. The Man Down feature has three phases:

1 The radio senses the Man Down condition and Pre-Alert Timer is initiated. 2 Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Pre-Alert Timer field. At the end of this time, the radio alerts the user on the Man Down status with an audible alert tone and Man-Down text on the screen. The Post-Alert Timer also initiates at this point. 3 Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. Once the timer expires, the Emergency alarm is transmitted. The Man Down Clear function is used in this phase to cancel the Man Down condition. The following scenarios affect the timers:

Pressing the PTT button suspends the Man Down timers; releasing the PTT button re-initiates the Pre-Alert Timer. Pressing other buttons on the radio does not impact these timers. Repositioning the radio exits the Man Down feature, which stops and resets the timers. Pressing a preprogrammed Clear button or pressing a Menu Select button preprogrammed for Clear stops and resets the timers. The timers do not restart until the radio is repositioned. Note Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. For details on operating the Emergency alerts, please see Emergency Operation on page 86. If the radio is preprogrammed to horizontal only, it must be worn in a vertical position otherwise the Man Down alert may be inadvertently triggered. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English BETA When the radio is programmed with Man Down feature, special care is required when charging the radio with a wall mounted charger. See Proper Ways to Handle the Radio on page 178 for details. Pre-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time that a Man Down condition must be present before the radio-user is warned of the Man Down condition. When the radio detects that it has returned to the vertical position or when the radio detects motion, the Pre-Alert timer stops and is reset. The Pre-Alert timer reinitiates when the radio detects it is in the horizontal position or motionless again. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Man Down condition before the Emergency alarm is transmitted. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio alerts the user with an audible tone and displays the Man-Down text. See Exiting Man Down Feature on page 96 to exit Man Down feature. Radio Alerts When Man Down Feature is Triggered The Man Down alert tone volume is directly related to the radio speaker volume. Ensure that the radio speaker volume is loud enough so that the user does not miss the Post-Alert tone. Note If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio including the Man Down tones. Triggering Emergency When the user does not clear the Man Down condition and the Post-Alert Timer comes to an end, Emergency Alarm or call is triggered. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. The radio also sends ID number and GPS coordinates to dispatcher if these features are enabled. User can exit Emergency following the Emergency procedure. See Emergency Operation on page 86 for details. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 95 English BETA Note At this point the Man Down features is complete. Use normal Emergency procedures to cancel Emergency transmissions. Radio Alerts When Man Down Enhanced is Triggered Note This feature is to be preprogrammed specifically to a zone and channel which supports Emergency feature. The volume and repetition duration of Man Down Enhanced alert tone could be customized and preprogrammed to suite the required situation. Consult your agent or qualified technician for more details. When the radio initiates Man Down Enhanced, you hear the Critical Man Down Continuous alert tone from the radio speaker. The volume of this tone is set to the louder of the preprogrammed minimum level or the current radio speaker level. This acts as a beacon to find the radio. Note If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the alert tone can be heard from the radio speaker. Once the alert tone is active, changing to another channel with different setup triggers a different response from the radio as described next. The alert tone is inhibited when you change to a channel without Emergency feature. The alert tone is inhibited when you change to a channel with Emergency but no Man Down feature. The current alert tone is inhibited and is replaced with a different alert tone when you change to a channel with Emergency and different Man Down configuration. The alert tone continues when you change to a channel with Emergency and similar Man Down configuration. Exiting Man Down Feature If you are not in a real Man Down situation, you should exit the Man Down feature and prevent BETA emergency from going off with the following operation. Perform one of the following actions:

Repositioning the radio or shaking the radio

(when motion sensitivity is enabled). Press the preprogrammed Man Down Clear Press the Menu Select button below Clr to button to exit. exit. Re-Initiating Man Down After exiting the Emergency Operation when the radio is still in Man Down condition (tilted achieving threshold angle or motionless), user must first exit Man Down condition to then reinitiate the Man Down feature. Return the radio to the vertical position or shake the radio (when motion sensitivity is enabled). Testing the Man Down Feature Enable the Emergency feature with Silent Alarm disabled, but not in Surveillance Mode before running this test on the radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 1 Turn the radio on and place in the vertical position, for at least 5 seconds. 2 Lay the radio down in the horizontal position. 3 Wait for alert tone. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The radio alerts with audible tone and displays Man-Down. If no tone is heard, make sure that the Man Down feature is enabled on your radio. If Man Down feature was not enabled, please enable it and repeat 1 to 3. If the Man Down feature is enabled and no tone is heard, send the radio to a qualified technician. Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). 97 English BETA The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode via 16-

Position Select knob:

a) Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode via the radio menu:

a) or to Chan. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. The display shows the current channel name. c) or to the required channel or mode. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the zone and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the zone and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. d) Press Sel to confirm the displayed channel. User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English BETA Note A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. Logging In as a User 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed User Login button. or to User and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. If the ID is invalid, the display shows momentary Invalid ID. 3 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. One of the following scenarios occurs:

99 English BETA If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. Note To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. Logging Out When you have logged in or you are using Offline mode, you can log out. Note Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. One of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows Clear private data?. Proceed to the next step. If the Delete Messages On Session End feature is enabled, the radio clears the private data and returns to User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. Select No to keep your private data. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). BETA A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. A query (ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution). Note Query is only supported within ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution. See Two-

Factor Authentication on page 112 and ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution on page 111 for details. Inbox The main menu consists of the following options:

Compose Drafts Sent Note See Status Icons on page 40 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 46 for more information on each menu option. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. 101 English BETA Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap).

, pressing 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 or to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. BETA If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. Note You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. You can also select the Save to Drafts option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 109 for more information. Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message or Query has a maximum length of 50 characters. You can select the required text from the Quick Text or Query. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

4 5 To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. or to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 103 English BETA 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 7 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Note You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. Note The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. BETA 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message is important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 or to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. 105 English BETA The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message is important. or to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English and Sending a New Text Message on page 102 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status icon. or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Receiving a Text Message Note When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. The following methods are options on how to receive a text message. The result of all the methods is the BETA same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message via the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

a) When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Receiving a text message via the radio menu:

a) When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Sel. or Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature to Inbox and press the Menu screen. Select button below Sel. or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 2 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del, or Back to access the option. 107 English BETA Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 44 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message Note The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English or to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. 6 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. BETA Note Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 or to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Sel. The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 4 or to the required text message and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. 109 English BETA or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sel. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 44 for more information. 2 3 t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Note Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. BETA You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Deleting a Text Message 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, scroll through the messages. or to 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the current message. Deleting All Text Messages 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Messaging feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 or to Inbox or Sent then press the Menu Select button below Clr to select all messages in the selected folder. The display shows Del All?. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS feature screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution The ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your data-enabled Motorola two-way radios. Federal mandate requires Two-Factor Authentication when querying Federal and State databases. With this advance messaging solution you have the ability enable Two-Factor Authentication. With Query and Two-Factor Authentication, you can use a secure system logon to initiate and receive key information on people, vehicles and properties when doing the regular security patrol. You can access to local or external databases such as the National Crime Information Center (NCIC), for "Hot Hits" on 111 English BETA priors and warrants. Query and Two-Factor Authentication has Criminal Justice Information Services (CJIS) security compliance for queries. With this Advanced Messaging Solution, ARS functionality splits between two protocols:

ARS for Device Registration New User Authentication for User Login TMS functionality splits between two protocols:

TMS for messaging New Service Advertisement for service availabilities The radio with Two-Factor capabilities are backward compatible with the existing device registration system and TMS servers. System Setup for ASTRO Advanced Messaging Solution Your user name, unit ID and password all need to be provisioned in PremierOne. Your user account in PremierOne needs to be linked to an RSA account specifying a token to be used with the Two-Factor passcode. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English The radios caches the user name, unit ID and or Single Factor password in the codeplug, this allows the radio to automatically log in to use Single Factor authentication upon power up or mode change. The Two-Factor passcode is not stored in the codeplug. You can upgrade the Single Factor session to a Two-

Factor session by entering the Two-Factor passcode only. After an interruption (for example mode change, DSR switch over, power loss), the radio is capable of restoring the active session in its current state as long as the session is active in the server. Note Power loss and power down are different activities, power down occurs when the user intentionally powers off the radio, power loss is when the battery dies or is removed from the unit. Two-Factor Authentication Two-Factor Authentication is an extension of existing ARS and TMS operation. This feature allows you to authenticate yourself with a username, unit ID, password and passcode. The purpose of this feature is to allow the sender of a text message to address a specific user of the radio, BETA so the message is delivered to the user, not to the radio which may have any user using it at the time. Secondly, this feature supports query authentication requirements so the query service knows which user originated a query. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. Logging in via the Two-Factor Authentication 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed User Login button. or to User, and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type or edit a username. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined username. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined username. If the selected predefined username has more than the maximum allowed characters, or an invalid character in it, the display shows momentary Invalid ID. 3 For radio enabled with Unit ID, perform one of the following actions:

or to [UnitID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type or edit a Unit ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 113 English BETA or to scroll through the list of predefined Unit IDs. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined Unit ID. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined Unit IDs at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined Unit ID. If the selected predefined Unit ID has more than the maximum allowed characters, or an invalid character in it, the display shows momentary Invalid UnitID. 4 Enter your password when you see a blinking cursor. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn or Ok. If only one-factor is enabled, the display shows 1F logged at the status. The login operation is complete. If login fails, the display shows momentary Login failed. The display returns to User Login screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English 6 For radio enabled with two-factor login, enter your passcode when you see a blinking cursor. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. The display shows In progress. If the login fails, the display shows momentary 2F pscd failed. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pscd to re-enter passcode. If successful, the display shows User Login screen with 2F logged in status to indicate Two-Factor Authentication complete. Logging out of Two-Factor Authentication Note Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. Radio which is successfully logged in to the secured system receives advertisement from the server that the access to the data for query is enabled. BETA 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Clear private data?. If the Delete Messages On Session End feature is enabled, the display shows momentary Private data cleared. 2 Select Yes to clear all your private data or select No to keep your private data. If you select Yes, the display shows momentary Private data cleared. Sending a Query This feature is available for radio users who have successfully logged in with the Two-Factor Authentication. Query is a special form of Quick Text marked with a flag that is replied or dispatched in normal TMS message. The query template needs to be configured in the quick test list of the CPS. You can choose from the quick text list, including queries if present. You shall receive a service advertisement message to indicate the Query is available after you have successfully logged in the radio with a Two-Factor Authentication. Note The query server must be selected as the destination so that it can receive the query message and respond the query with text message. The query server must be an entry in the data user list in the CPS. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed TMS Query button and proceed to Step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 115 English BETA 4 5 or to Query and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 6 Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 8 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. Note The server responds to your query with the required report in text messages. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 104 for more information. Receiving a Query You shall receive the information you have requested in TMS format. When you receive a query, you hear a unique, high-

pitched chirp and the display shows the message BETA icon flagged with Priority. The display shows momentary New msg. To access the Inbox, press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button or press the Menu Select button directly below TMS. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Note If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation, when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio does not transmit until you set the Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Secure Operations Selecting Clear Transmissions Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Selecting Secure Transmissions Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the secure position. Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. Note If the selected channel is preprogrammed for secure-only operation, when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Secure TX only. The radio does transmit until you set the Secure/ Clear switch to the secure position. 117 English BETA You can request to configure the radio to ignore the clear voice or insecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. Managing Encryption Loading an Encryption Key Note Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading, and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. 2 Select the required keys and press the Menu Select button directly below LOAD on the KVL. This loads the encryption keys into your radio. When the key has been loaded successfully, one of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear the radio sounds a short tone for single-

key radios. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English You hear the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In Trunked Multikey BETA addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Note When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. 119 English BETA The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 2 or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. b) Note

, the PTT button, or the Exit Press menu selection, or turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. The following methods are options on how to erase the selected encryption keys. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English Erasing the selected encryption keys via the radio menu:

a) or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. The display shows the available key erase options. d) or to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. e) Select Erase all keys? or Erase single key? by pressing the Menu Select button below Yes to erase the encryption key(s) in the radio. You can return to the previous screen by pressing the Menu Select button below No. Erasing the single key in radios with the single-key option and erasing all keys in radios with the BETA multikey option via the preprogrammed Top Side

(Select) button and Top (Orange) button:

a) Press and hold the Top Side (Select) button. b) While holding Top Side (Select) button down, press the Top (Orange) button. The display shows Please wait. When all the encryption keys have been erased, the display shows All keys erased. Note Do not press the Top (Orange) button before pressing the Top Side (Select) button, unless you are in an emergency situation as this sends an emergency alarm. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) is loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. 1 or to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. Note The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-

the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only 121 English BETA for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key

(UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all of the encryption keys is erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio could not be over the air rekeyed. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English Hear Clear Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the Expander background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. BETA Random FM Noise Canceller

(Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Security Radio Lock This feature changes your radio to a more robust security system that protects the use of the secure encryption keys. If this feature is enabled in your radio by a qualified radio technician, when you turn the radio on, the display shows Radio locked. Unlocking Your Radio 1 Enter your numeric password. Secure-equipped radios 6 to 8 characters. Clear radios 0 to 8 characters. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to enter the code. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to exit the feature. If the password is correct, the radio unlocks. If the password is incorrect, the display show Incorrect password and the radio remains locked. If you enter three incorrect passwords in a row, the display shows Deadlock. Turn the radio off and then on, and begin again at Step 1. Important For Secure Radios Only After a total of 17 consecutive incorrect passwords

(turning the radio off and on does not reset this number), the radio erases all of its encryption keys and shows Deadlock. See a qualified radio technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 123 English BETA If you forget the password, enter ******** to erase all keys and revert the password in the radio back to the default password of 01234567. Changing Your Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Unlock Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 10. Note If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Tactical Inh Encode Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 7 Enter the new password. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English BETA 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 10. Note If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature

(Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. 1 or to Logf. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logf. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s One of the following results occur.:

The display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. Radio Stun and Kill Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-activate the stunned radio. Using Radio Stun 1 or to Stun. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Stun. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 125 English BETA 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. The display shows radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or Press the Menu Select button directly below to the required ID. LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Decrypt failed. If the receiving radio is powered off, your radio display shows No Acknowledgement. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. Note To un-stun a radio, follow the procedure in Unlocking Your Radio on page 123. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English Radio Kill This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. The killed radio can only be recovered from KILL with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. 1 or to Kill. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kill. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. The display shows radio Contact IDs. BETA 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or Press the Menu Select button directly below to the required ID. LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Decrypt failed. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Acknowledgement. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. Press and hold the Top Side button then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System The Global Navigation System (GNSS) in the radio integrated the information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) and Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio. The geographical location is expressed as latitude and longitude or Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) format per request from customers. Note This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 127 English BETA For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. Once GPS is enabled, the radio displays the GPS icon on the screen. The dispatcher can always request the system to determine the real-time location coordinates of the radio. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location coordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio BETA Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. 129 English BETA Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) Coordinates This feature can only be enabled through CPS configuration. When the MGRS coordinate is enabled, all location coordinates are displayed in MGRS format, including the editable locations in GPS. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature Note An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature to on or follow the following procedure to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 130 English The display shows Location off. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To obtain a location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below On . Press the Menu Select button directly below to Turn On GPS and press the Optn. Menu Select button directly below Sel. or The front display shows the MGRS or latitude/

longitude location, time, and date of the last successful location fix. 4 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current location along with the UTC (Zulu) time and date that the location fix was obtained. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. BETA If the radio fails to get a location fix, the display shows No service and returns to the previous display. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to 5. or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to 5. A blinking cursor appears in the screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows Current loc saved as

<Waypoint name>. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The display shows Current loc saved as

[Home]. The display shows Current loc saved as

[Destination]. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 131 English BETA 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the list. to select a waypoint to view the or or location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To view the MGRS or latitude/longitude location, time and date of the selected waypoint, View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press preprogrammed GPS button.

, the PTT button, or the Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. BETA 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint Note Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination can be edited by the user. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [Home] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to [Destination] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 or to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press to move to the next number/

coordinates. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 133 English BETA Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [Home] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [Destination] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. or Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows Delete <Waypoint name>

Confirm?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <Waypoint name>deleted . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Note You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. BETA 2 3 4 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Delete All saved waypnts Confirm?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 135 English BETA If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Trunking System Controls Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-

pitched tone and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue, in Failsoft, to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Rotate the Mode Knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. Your radio remains in this out-of-

range condition until it locks onto a control channel, it locks onto a failsoft channel, or it is turned off. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/

channel combination and Site trunking. Note When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English BETA This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/

Unlock button. Follow the following procedure to lock and unlock a site via the radio menu. 1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site locked. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. The display shows momentary the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Changing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Press and hold down the Menu Select button Displ/Srch button. directly below RSSI. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning site. 137 English BETA When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Serial Port (SPP) Turning On Bluetooth Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth-

This feature allows your radio to extend its functionality by connecting to external proprietary Motorola accessories. Note It is recommended to use Motorola proprietary Mission Critical Wireless (MCW) devices with APX radios during Mission Critical operations as other Bluetooth devices may or may not meet the mission critical standard. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. The default setting for Bluetooth-enabled radio is Bluetooth on. See Turning Off the Bluetooth on page 139 to turn off the Bluetooth. Currently your radio supports the following Bluetooth devices or profiles. Headset (HSP) Dial Up Networking (DUN) Personal Area Networking (PAN) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 138 English The following methods are options on how to turn on the Bluetooth. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turning on the Bluetooth via the radio menu BT:

or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. b) or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows Status On, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning on the Bluetooth via the preprogrammed button:

BETA a) Press the preprogrammed button to turn on the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth on, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. Turning Off the Bluetooth The following methods are options on how to turn off the Bluetooth. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turning off the Bluetooth via the radio menu BT:

or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. b) or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Status Off, and disappears. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth via the preprogrammed button:

a) Press the preprogrammed button to turn off the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth off and disappears. Re-Pair Timer There are two options for configuring the Bluetooth pairing type of the radio. The type defines the duration the radio and the accessory retain the pairing information. Immediate (For MCW accessories only.) When the radio and/or device is turned off after pairing, the keys are lost. Due to this, when your radio and your device are turned on again, they are unable to re-

connect. The user must re-pair the devices to re-establish a new set of pairing keys. See Pairing with Low A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 139 English BETA Infinite Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate

(For MCW Accessories only) Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing

(LF-MPP) Feature on page 141 and Standard Pairing Feature on page 143.

(For all Bluetooth devices.) When the radio and/or device are turned off after pairing, keys are not lost. When the radio and the device are turned on again, they can resume the Bluetooth connection without user intervention. Re-Pair Timer Scenarios When the radio is powered off, pairing key is lost immediately, and accessory attempts to pair again. If pairing is unsuccessful within the Drop Timer value, the accessory automatically powers off. When the accessory is powered off, all keys are lost immediately, and the user must re-pair the devices. Re-Pair Timer Scenarios Re-Pair Timer Options Infinite (For all Bluetooth devices) When the device loses Bluetooth connection, the device will attempt to re-establish Bluetooth Connection within the Drop Timer value. When the radio is powered off, the accessory attempts to re-

establish the Bluetooth Connection for a period of time depending upon the Drop Timer value. If the device fails to reconnect within the period, the accessory then powers off. Bluetooth Drop Timer The Bluetooth Drop Timer has two different settings and functions, depending upon the selection of the Re-Pair Timer. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 140 English BETA Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate

(For MCW Accessories only) Infinite (For all Bluetooth devices) Description 0 15 minutes programmable buffer time to re-establish the Bluetooth Connection when the Bluetooth signal is out of range. If either device powers off, the pairing keys are immediately cleared from both devices and the devices must re-pair. This Timer only applies to the accessory. The programmable timer choices are: 0 15 minutes, 2 hours, 4 hours or 8 hours. Do note there are exceptions for Operation Critical Wireless (OCW) headset and PTT which are preprogrammed to 8 hours. This timer is a "stay alive" timer where the accessory remains on without the device reconnecting before powering off. The radio remains on until the user powers A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Re-Pair Timer Options Description off the radio. The radio and accessory remains paired indefinitely. Once the device re-

connect, the timer is reset. The radio could not control the Drop Timer of Personal Area Networking (PAN), Dial-Up Networking

(DUN), Commercial Off- The-Shelf (COTS) and data services. It depends on the specifications of these external devices. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information about these timers. To establish the Bluetooth Connection, see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-

MPP) Feature on page 141 or Standard Pairing Feature on page 143 . Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing

(LF-MPP) Feature Ensure that Bluetooth feature of your radio is on and the Bluetooth tones are enabled. 141 English BETA Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The range of Bluetooth operation is 10 meters line-of-

sight communication. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the signal transmitter (your radio) and the location of the receiver (your device or accessory). Obstacles that can cause an obstruction in the line-of-

sight include trees, buildings, mountains, cars and etc. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your accessory to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position the accessory and radio closer to each other (within the 10 meter defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Note Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 142 English Time power consumption, not the Standby Time consumption. Turn on the accessory. Then place it close to the radio aligning the Bluetooth Pairing Location (

) on the radio to the Bluetooth Pairing Location (a blue dot) on the accessory. If the pairing process is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The radio begins to connect to the device. If the pairing process fails, you hear a short, low-

pitched tone. The display shows Bluetooth pairing failed. Repeat this step. The radio tries to establish connection with the device once paired. Note If the connection fails within 6 seconds, you hear a decremental-pitched tone to indicate that the device is unpaired. The display shows

<Device Type> unpaired. Repeat this step to re-initiate the pairing process. If the connection is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The display shows <Device BETA Type> connected and the Bluetooth icon turns from Standard Pairing Feature to

. If the radio has the pairing record of the device and the connection fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> connect failed. Radio Indications of Lost Bluetooth Connection The radio shows connection. Below is the scenario and radio indications when the connection is interrupted. when the device has a Bluetooth starts blinking for up to 10 seconds. You hear The a decremental-pitched tone. The display shows

<Device Type> alternating with disconnected. If the Bluetooth device successfully re-connects before the Bluetooth 10 second Re-Connection Timer expires, the display shows momentary <Device Type> connected, and Bluetooth device fails to re-connect within 10 stops blinking, or if the seconds, the blinking is replaced by a persistent

. Note Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk time power consumption, not the Standby time consumption. The Bluetooth Standard Pairing feature enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to search for other Bluetooth enabled and discoverable device. Once the device is discovered, you can initiate your radio to send a pairing request to pair with the device. This feature also enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to be visible to another Bluetooth enabled device and receive request to pair from other device. The Standard Pairing feature supports pairing Authentication Personal Pairing Number or PIN which ensure your radio recognizes the correct device to pair. The PIN must be exchanged with the radio or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 143 English BETA the device before the pairing completes. Your radio prompts for the Authentication PIN when needed. Refer to your devices manual for details about the Bluetooth Authentication PIN of your device if needed. Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device Ensure the Bluetooth on your device is turned on and is set to Discoverable in order to enable your radio to detect your device in Bluetooth. Bluetooth Search in Bluetooth Standard Pairing method is used to scan for other Bluetooth devices nearby. It is set to off by default. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button . or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. and press the Menu Select button directly below On. to Search Devices or If successful, the display shows Searching for BT devices followed by the names of Bluetooth devices found, if any. When the search timer t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 144 English expires, Available Dev screen shows a list of Bluetooth devices found. To stop the search before the search timer expires, press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button or the Menu Select button below Stop. If the feature fails to initiate, the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The screen shows BT Search failed. Press the Menu Select button below Back to return to Bluetooth feature screen, or press Exit to return to Home screen. or the Menu Select button below 2 or to the device name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the device. The radio starts pairing to the device. To continue with Bluetooth pairing, see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-MPP) Feature on page 141. Turning On Bluetooth Visibility Turning Bluetooth visibility to on enables other Bluetooth devices to search for your radio. The visibility of the Bluetooth is set to off by default. BETA The following methods are options on how to turn on Bluetooth visibility. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turn on Bluetooth visibility via radio menu BT:

or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. b) or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The status changes to Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn on Bluetooth visibility. Turn on Bluetooth visibility via the preprogrammed button. a) Press the preprogrammed button to enable the Bluetooth visibility feature. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s When the timer expires, the display shows momentary Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn on Bluetooth visibility. Note Press the preprogrammed button to toggle the Bluetooth visibility on or off. Receiving Pairing Request from other Devices When your radio receives a pairing request from other device, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair request. Press the Menu Select button below Ok to accept or Cncl to refuse pairing request. Turning Off Bluetooth Visibility Ensure that Bluetooth Visibility is turned on. The following methods are options on how to turn off Bluetooth visibility. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turn off Bluetooth visibility via radio menu BT:

145 English BETA a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Visibility Off. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn off Bluetooth visibility. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. To disable the Bluetooth visibility, press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visibility Off. Visibility mode is disabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn off Bluetooth visibility. PIN Authentication in Pairing t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 146 For the security of your radio, Bluetooth Pairing PIN feature is designed to enable your radio to verify the English correct device to pair before initiating the pairing. Authentic PIN is used for the verification. Note The compare PIN authentication method is only applicable for Bluetooth version 2.1 and above. Pairing the Authentication PIN when Receiving a Pairing Request 1 When the radio display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair request, perform one of the following actions:

To accept, press the Menu Select button below Ok. To reject, press the Menu Select button below Cncl Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. When the pairing timer expires, the display shows

<Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. If you choose to accept the pairing process, the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX. BETA If you choose to reject the pairing process, the display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions when the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX.:

Press the Menu Select button below Ok if the PIN is correct. Press the Menu Select button below Cncl to reject if the PIN number is incorrect. The display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. When the PIN authentication timer expires, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair canceled and return to Home screen. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress...., <Device Friendly Name>

paired followed by <Device Friendly Name>connected. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

pair failed (if the pairing timer expires). The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

connect failed (if the connecting timer expires). If the PIN is correct but the profiles are not supported, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Pairing the Authentication PIN with the Generated Numeric PIN Follow the procedure inSearching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device on page 144 to search for available Bluetooth devices. Start pairing with the Authentication PIN by following the steps described next. 1 or to the required device. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to initiate pairing. Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. 147 English BETA If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress... followed by a randomly generated numeric PIN, Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If unsuccessful, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Available Dev screen. 2 Press Ok to continue pairing the radio and the device. The pairing process can be canceled by pressing the Menu Select button below Cncl. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress,<Device Friendly Name> paired, Connecting in progress... followed by

<Device Friendly Name>connected. The display returns to the Bluetooth feature screen. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

pair failed (if the PIN numbers are different).

<Device Friendly Name> connect failed

(if the connection fails). t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 148 English The display returns to Available Dev screen. Pairing the Authentication PIN by Manually Keying in the Same PIN Follow the procedure in Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device on page 144 to search for available Bluetooth devices. Start pairing with the Authentication PIN by following the steps described next. 1 or to the required device. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to initiate pairing. Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress... followed by a request for PIN number. A blinking cursor appears below the Enter PIN:. If unsuccessful, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Available Dev screen. 2 Use the keypad to enter the PIN. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space BETA to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete. Turning On the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset) 3 Press Ok to continue pairing the radio and the device. Enter the same PIN number on the device. The pairing process can be canceled by pressing the Menu Select button below Cncl. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress,<Device Friendly Name> paired, Connecting in progress... followed by

<Device Friendly Name>connected. The display returns to the Bluetooth feature screen. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name>

PIN auth fail (if the PIN numbers are different). The following methods are options on how to turn on the Bluetooth audio. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning on the Bluetooth audio via radio menu BT:

a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows On. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit.

<Device Friendly Name> connect failed

(if the connection fails). The display returns to Available Dev screen. Turning on the Bluetooth audio via the preprogrammed button:

a) To route the audio routing from the radio to the headset, short press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Headset on. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 149 English BETA Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio) Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device The following methods are options on how to turn off the Bluetooth Audio. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning off the Bluetooth audio via radio menu BT:

a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Off. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth audio via the preprogrammed button:

a) To route the audio routing from the headset to the radio, press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Speaker on. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 150 English Ensure that the Bluetooth audio device is connected to the radio. Your radio can only control the volume of MCW and OCW Bluetooth enabled audio device. If the radio is paired with other Bluetooth enabled audio device, its volume is independent from the APX radio. In this case, the volume is only adjustable on the device. Adjust volume up/down on the Bluetooth audio device. The radio display shows Volume XX, and you hear a short, medium-pitched tone. Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information 1 2 or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Devices. Once the display highlights the Devices, the display shows XX connected alternates with XX paired. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. BETA 4 If there are devices being paired or connected, along the list of <Device Friendly Name>

or to see the status of each device. If there are no active Bluetooth devices being paired or connected, the display shows No devices. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

To clear the device from the list, to the required device, press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. or To exit from this function, press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen without deleting the device name. If Clr is selected, the display shows <Device Friendly Name> clear?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes or No to proceed delete the device or to exit this function and return to previous screen.. If the device is deleted successfully, the display shows <Devlice Friendly Name> cleared to indicate clearing is successful. If the device is not deleted successfully, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Devlice Friendly Name> clear failed. The display returns to previous screen. Note If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information The following methods are options on how to clear all Bluetooth devices information. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Clearing all Bluetooth devices information via the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button:

a) Long press the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. 151 English BETA If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. Clearing all Bluetooth devices information via the radio menu Clr:

a) or to Devices and press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices?. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to proceed. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 152 English Note If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) Editing the Bluetooth Friendly Name Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Friendly name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears in the Friendly Name screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the text. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to save the new Friendly Name and return to the Bluetooth feature screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Bluetooth feature screen. BETA Over-the-Air Programming (POP 25, ASTRO 25, ASTRO Conventional and Wi-Fi) This feature enables configuration data and firmware to be upgraded to your radio over-the-air. Full use of the radio is retained during the data transfer without interrupting communication. For ASTRO 25 and ASTRO Conventional, the upgrade pauses to give priorities to voice call, and continues after the voice call ended. For Wi-Fi, the upgrade process runs concurrently with voice calls. Once a configuration upgrade is downloaded to your radio, you can install new changes immediately or delay changes to be installed on the radio when it is being powered up. Your radio can also be configured to allow you to accept or reject an upgrade. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Responding to the Notification of Upgrade 1 The display shows Upgrade? and two short, medium- pitched tones sounds every 30 seconds until the user makes a choice of accepting, delaying, or rejecting the request 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Acpt to accept the request to upgrade immediately. Press the Menu Select button below Dlay to delay the request to upgrade. Press the Menu Select button below Rej to reject the request to upgrade. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose to accept, the display shows Programming Dont power off to indicate the upgrade is about to begin. The radio resets to install the upgrade. In the case of configuration data upgrade, this process only takes a few seconds. In the case of firmware upgrade, the installation takes several minutes. 153 English BETA Note The radio cannot be used while the upgrade is being installed. Therefore, make sure to only accept the upgrade at a convenient time when immediate radio use is not required. If you choose to delay, a configuration data upgrade is installed automatically at the next power up. However, in the case of a firmware upgrade, the radio prompts Upgrade? again at the next power up. If you choose to reject, the display shows Upg Aborted. The radio continues to function with the current configuration until it gets reprogrammed. Note If your radio has problems upgrading over-the-

air, consult a qualified technician for details. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum duration of all different voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your agent if Voice Announcement is available for the feature you need. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

High Enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone or channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button (which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 154 English BETA announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note Pressing this preprogrammed playback button enables the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel remaining within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s special situation that they need to be aware of. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Note Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) Sending SSA Notification to Single Site A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. 155 English BETA 3 4 5 The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 156 English If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] to send alert via manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. BETA If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 6 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID>does not exist. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat 3. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 157 English BETA 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. 3 4 5 t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 158 English If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. BETA The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows Sending req. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the single site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the single site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 159 English BETA The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 3 4 s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 160 English 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. BETA 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. Wi-Fi This feature allows you to turn Wi-Fi on or off. Wi-Fi can be used for wireless programming of the radio with the Radio Management tool. Note Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The following methods are options on how to turn Wi-

Fi on or off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the preprogrammed button:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s a) To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the radio menu button:

a) or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. 161 English BETA The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the front display. signal strength indicator, In addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. 2 Press to exit. Utilities Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Emergency Call (Incoming Only) Note The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The following methods are options on how to view recent calls. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Viewing recent calls via the preprogrammed Recent Calls button:

t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 162 English BETA a) Press the preprogrammed Recent Calls button. or to scroll through the list. b) c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu or Select button directly below Exit, press the PTT button. Viewing recent calls via the radio menu:

or to Rcnt. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. or c) d) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu to scroll through the list. Select button directly below Exit, PTT button. or the The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Using the Flip Display This feature allows you to flip the content of the top display upside down. It is particularly useful when you would like to read the top display while the radio is still in the carry holder attached to your belt. To flip the display, press and hold the preprogrammed Light/Flip button Selecting a Basic Zone Bank The Basic Zone Select feature must to be preprogrammed to the 3-position A-B-C switch, while the Basic Zone Bank feature must be preprogrammed to any side button or Top (Orange) button before you can use this feature. This feature allows twice as many zones to be accessed from a switch, doubling the amount of switch positions. Use the preprogrammed Basic Zone Bank button to toggle the position between Bank 1 and Bank 2. The top display shows the status icons (A, B, C, D, E or F) or the zone name based on the bank and switch position selected. Note See the Basic Zone Bank 1 and Basic Zone Bank 2 icons for more information on the status icons. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 163 English BETA Selecting an Enhanced Zone Bank Selecting the Power Level This feature is created in order to allow users to communicate in more zones. An Enhanced Zone Bank (EZB) consists of three zones. This also means each icon A, B, C, ... or Y consist of three zones. You can use the preprogrammed 3-position A-B-C switch to select the first, second or third zone in an EZB. This feature allows user to navigate from up to 75 zones in 25 EZBs. Note The Zone Select feature must to be preprogrammed to the 3-position A-B-C switch, while the Enhanced Zone Bank feature must be preprogrammed to any side button or Top (Orange) button before you can use this feature. 1 Press the preprogrammed EZB Up or EZB Down button to scroll the EZB up or down or press and hold the preprogrammed EZB Up or EZB Down button to fast scroll the EZB up or down. 2 Turn the 3-Position A/B/C Switch to select the first, second or third zone in the selected EZB. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 164 English Note This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. These reduced transmit power level settings do not affect the receiving performance of your radio, nor diminish the overall quality of the audio and data functionality of the radio given the following conditions. Power level Low enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level High enables a longer transmitting distance. The following methods are options on how to select the power level. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level via the Transmit Power Level switch:

BETA a) Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level via the radio menu:

or to Pwr. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. The following methods are options on how to select a radio profile. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting a radio profile via the preprogrammed Profile button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below to scroll through the menu selections. or Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. a) Selecting a radio profile via the radio menu:

or to Prfl and press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. b) or to scroll through the menu selections. 165 English BETA c) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias This feature allows you to display or hide the radio alias (name). Press the Menu Select button directly below MyID. The display shows momentary Radio ID off, and the radio alias disappears from the Home screen or the display shows momentary Radio ID on, and the radio alias appears on the Home screen. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio's front display. Perform one of the following actions:

To toggle the backlight on or off, press the preprogrammed Light/Flip button. To turn the backlight on, press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Navigation button, or any programmable radio controls or buttons. Locking and Unlocking the Keypad and Controls You can lock the keypad, programmable buttons, rotary knobs, and switches of your radio to avoid inadvertent entry. Check with your dealer or qualified technician for best selection to suit your usage. 1 Toggle the preprogrammed Keypad/Control Lock button or switch to on. The display shows Kypd/Ctrl Lock. 2 Toggle again to unlock the controls. 166 English BETA Turning the Controls and Keypad Buttons Tones On or Off You can enable and disable the tones of Navigation buttons, controls and keypad if needed. Turning the tones on or off via the preprogrammed Mute button:

a) To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Mute button. Turning the tones on or off via the radio menu:

or to Mute. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. The following methods are options on how to turn Voice Mute on or off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Voice Mute off or on via the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a) To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off via the radio menu:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to VMut. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. The display shows momentary Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. 167 English BETA The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. The default time setting is a 12-hour clock. The display shows 12:00AM. The AM/PM selection is not available for the 24-

hour clock setting. Note You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Time and Date Setup You can set the time and date for your radio. Settings:

t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 168 English The default setting for the domestic date shows MDY. Note Check with your dealer or system administrator for additional programmable settings for this feature. Editing the Time and Date 1 or to Clck. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Clck. The display shows the current setting of the radio. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The first item blinks. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to change the selected item. BETA or one or more times to move to an item you wish to change. selected item. to change the or Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes and return to the Home screen. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished to save your changes and return to the Home screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to discard all changes and return to the Home screen. Press without saving your changes. at any time to return to the Home screen Note If a call arrives while the radio is in the clock-setting menu, the radio exits clock setting and displays the call information. Any changes made before the call is not saved. Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Analog Options Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available

(preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Carrier squelch (C) Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. PL or DPL A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Result You hear any digital traffic. 169 English BETA Option Normal Squelch Selective Switch Result You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch

(DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear any activity on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 170 English Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-

channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. BETA Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. The following table shows the variations of smart PTT:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit. Quick-Key Override A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio could receive messages but not replying the acknowledgement request of the received message. User could physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. Note Acknowledgement of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. 171 English BETA Enabling Transmit Inhibition Disabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

Switch the preprogrammed Transmit Inhibit switch to Transmit Inhibit enabled. or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Press the Transmit Inhibit programmable button. Note If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit on. You hear a sequence of short, lowhigh tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, lowpitched tone (reject tone). Note The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 172 English Perform one of the following actions:

Switch the preprogrammed Transmit Inhibit switch to Transmit Inhibit disabled position. or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Press the Transmit Inhibit programmable button. Note If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit off. You hear a sequence of short, highlow tone (Transmit Inhibit Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. IMPRES Battery Annunciator This feature displays the current capacity and charges cycles of your battery when an IMPRES Battery is powering your radio. This feature must be enabled in your radio to see the information. BETA The information shown are:

Charge Percentage Remaining Capacity Estimated Charges Percentage of current battery capacity. Remaining power of the battery in mAh. Number of charges cycles the battery has gone through. Accessing the Battery Info screen 1 or to Batt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Batt. The display shows the details of the battery. 3 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information Control Assignments IP Display Soft ID (If enabled) Note The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version Option Board Type (optional) Option Board Bluetooth Address (optional) Expansion Board Type (optional) DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band(s) A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 173 English BETA Processor Version Option Board Serial Number (optional) Option Board Software Version (optional) Language Pack ID and Version (only when the language of the display is set to non-English) MAC Address Note To return to the Home screen, press time. at any 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. Press to return to the Home screen . Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Information screen. 2 or to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the IP Info screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 174 English BETA Press to return to the Home screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 28 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Control Map screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Editing the Soft ID Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to change your username. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to Soft ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the current Soft ID. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the current Soft ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Soft ID screen. 175 English BETA 4 Use the keypad to edit the text. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to save the new Soft ID and return to the previous screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 176 English BETA Helpful Tips Radio Care Caution Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the with any radio. Never poke this vent objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radios submergibility will be lost.

(For APX 8000 R Radios Only) Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum H e p l f u l i T p s submersion time of 2 hours. Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio.

(For APX 8000 R Radios Only) Elastomer technology materials used for seals in rugged portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola recommends that rugged radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the watertight integrity of the radio. Motorola details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment needed to inspect, maintain and troubleshoot radio seals in the radios service manual. If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Otherwise, the water could short-circuit the radio. If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. 177 English ABETA Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician. Cleaning Your Radio Caution Do not use solvents to clean your radio as most chemicals may permanently damage the radio housing and textures. Do not submerge the radio in the detergent solution. To clean the external surfaces of your radio, follow the procedure described next. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild dishwashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-

metallic, shortbristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the s p T i l u f p e H l 178 English connectors, controls or crevices. Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. 3 Clean battery contacts with a lint-free cloth to remove dirt or grease. Proper Ways to Handle the Radio Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. Never carry the radio by the antenna. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Do not submerge the radio unless it is a ruggedized.(APX 8000 R model) Avoid subjecting the radio to corrosives, solvents or chemicals. Do not disassemble the radio. Caution Do not use the radio without an accessory connector or a dust cover in place as contamination can build up on the contacts. When charging the radio using a wall mounted charger, the radio must be turned off. Otherwise, the Man Down Alert and Emergency may be accidentally triggered. BETA Radio Service and Repair Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for an additional period of either one or two years beyond the normal expiration date of the standard warranty. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center at 3761 South Central Avenue, Rockford, IL 61102 (800) 227-6772 / (847)725-4200. H e p l f u l i T p s Battery Care Battery Charge Status the LED and sounds. the fuel gauge icon on the display. Your radio can indicate the batterys charge status through:

You can also check the battery charge status via the menu entry. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 172 for more information. LED and Sounds When your battery is low:

the LED blinks red when the PTT button is pressed. you hear a low-battery chirp (short, high-pitched tone). Fuel Gauge Icons A blinking fuel gauge icon ( ) is displayed only when the battery voltage drops to low level. In this case, replace the battery with a fully charged one. 179 English BETA Gauge Battery Charge 76% to 100% full[3]

Gauge Battery Charge Top Display:

Top Display:

Top Display:

51% to 75%[3]

26% to 50%[3]

11% to 25%[3]

10% or less (at 10%, the gauge begins blinking) Top Display:

Top Display:

s p T i l u f p e H l 180 3 These are for IMPRES battery operation only. English BETA Battery Recycling and Disposal In the U.S. and Canada, Motorola participates in the nationwide Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC) program for battery collection and recycling. Many retailers and dealers participate in this program. For the location of the drop-off facility closest to you, access RBRC's Internet web site at www.rbrc.com or call 1-800-8-BATTERY. This internet site and telephone number also provide other useful information concerning recycling options for consumers, businesses, and governmental agencies. H e p l f u l i T p s 181 English BETA Accessories The accessory link below is for APX radios. Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all APX models and/or bandsplits. Please refer to the specific APX radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Note GPS only antenna is only used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. s e i r o s s e c c A 182 English BETA Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

bearing (state whether you are using true or latitude and longitude magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

183 English BETA on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Number Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 184 English 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 BETA 18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 185 English BETA 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 Note

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. Note A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s Input Voltage

(Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 186 English BETA Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. ACK distances from fixed and mobile devices with high levels of security. l G o s s a r y Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth pairing occurs when Active Channel Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 ASTRO Conventional Autoscan Bluetooth Acknowledgment of communication. A channel that has traffic on it. An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Bluetooth is an open wireless technology standard for exchanging data over short Call Alert Carrier Squelch two bluetooth devices exchanged a passkey to form a paired Bluetooth wireless connection. Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the 187 English BETA Channel Control Channel Conventional Conventional Scan List COTS Cursor operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/ data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater (see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Commercial Off-The-Shelf A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Deadlock Digital Private Line (DPL) Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping DSR EID Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio. The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Dynamic System Resilience Encrypted Integrated Data y r a s s o G l 188 English BETA ESN Failsoft FCC FM Hang Up Home screen IV&D KVL LCD LED Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Integrated Voice and Data Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display. Light-emitting diode. Li-Ion Man Down MCW MDC Menu Entry Monitor Lithium ion. A life-saving feature that senses the radio user may be in trouble by monitoring the whether the radio is in a vertical or horizontal position or whether the radio is motionless. When this feature is triggered, the radio alerts the user with audio and visual alerts. It can also trigger Emergency Alarm the Post-Alert Timer is not cancelled. Mission Critical Wireless Motorola Data Communication A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the

,

, and buttons. Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear l G o s s a r y 189 English BETA static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Nickel-metal-hydride. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Operation Critical Wireless Over-the-air rekeying. Page Personality PIN PremierOne Preprogrammed Private

(Conversation) Call A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number A software application which streamlines critical real time operations and simplifies system administration to deliver accurate, consistent and integrated information remotely to the requestors. Refers to a software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. Private Line (PL) A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code NiMH Non-Tactical/

Revert y r a s s o G l 190 English OCW OTAR BETA Programmable PTT Radio Frequency

(RF) Repeater Selective Call Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-

transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to Selective Switch Squelch SSI Standby Status Calls Tactical/ Non-

Revert conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. Synchronous Serial Interface An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. l G o s s a r y 191 English BETA degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. A grouping of channels. Zone Talkaround Talkgroup TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard

(formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 y r a s s o G l 192 English BETA Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX 8000 Portable Units Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year For LACR region:

ASTRO APX 8000 Portable Units Product Accessories Three (3) Years One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 193 English BETA ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 194 English BETA service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent 195 English BETA that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 196 English MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is BETA granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only:

This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/

Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 197 English BETA APX8000_M3_BackCover_HalfLetter_P299C.fm Page 2 Wednesday, April 15, 2015 7:27 PM Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. May 2015.

*MN001425A01*

MN001425A01-AA BETA

 

 

 

 

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Date: January 14, 2022 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Class II Permissive Change for PCB and Part Modification and PAG C2PCPX Dear Sir/Madam, With reference to the C2PCPX procedure subject to PAG approval (item C2PCPX in KDB Publication 388624 D02) and KDB inquiry #144531, the application shall meet the following conditions:

1) The requirements of 2.1043 are fulfilled, i.e., devices block functions for the fundamental frequency, primary modulator circuit, maximum power or field strength ratings shall remain unchanged. Overall block diagram maintained no changes to primary modulator circuit, maximum power or field strength ratings. 2) Transmitter PCB layout and parts changes are only permitted if there is no change in the identification of a devices form, functional specification, as initially granted, or previously approved under a Class II permissive change. No change in terms of layout and functional specification. 3) PCB changes are limited to non-substantive modifications layout changes to the same size physical circuit board previously granted. Yes. PCB stack up, form factor and material are maintained. 4) C2PCPX is not permitted to add, remove, augment, or change capabilities, such as transmitters, increased bandwidth, additional rule parts, bands, etc. There are no addition or removal in the transmitter capabilities, bandwidth or rules part. 5) In the PAG submission for item C2PCPX, the applicant shall provide complete information on testing demonstrating that the proposed changes for fundamental emissions are unchanged within the normal acceptable tolerances and out band emissions do not exceed the appropriate limits. The PAG submission shall include all applicable test reports and internal photos. The test reports and internal photos are provided in the application. 6) The modified device shall not be marketed under the existing grant of certification before confirmation that the C2PCPX PAG is approved and granted. Yes. 7) Software Defined Radio (SDR) grants that use the C2PCPX procedure are not permitted to make subsequent Class III permissive changes. Software Defined Radio (SDR) is not used for this application. 8) The C2PCPX PAG procedure has no impact on the provisions of V) of this publication for nonSDR software-only changes, thus adding an equipment class when related to rule changes is still permitted. There is no addition of equipment class. 9) Class I permissive changes are not permitted under this C2PCPX procedure. Yes, Class I permissive changes were not performed ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Sincerely, ____________________ Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Product changes illustration and comparison Description of the changes:

replaced. 1. The changes were triggered due to BT/WLAN chipset part shortage and a new BT/WIFI chipset is 2. Few passive components were replaced at Power Management section (PMIC), BT/WiFi Circuitry, 3.6V Switching Regulator and 3.3V LDO due to new BT/WLAN chipset part design requirement. All replacement parts performance are comparable to the existing parts. 3. Passive and protection components added for UL certification requirement on Audio PA circuit. 4. There is no mechanical change. 5. No change to the sales model number. 6. Reuse shipping batteries, chargers and accessories. 7. No changes to the RF board. ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Before Changes After Changes RF Board (LMR) No changes RF board without shield (Top) RF board without shield (Top) No changes RF board without shield (Bottom) RF board without shield (Bottom) ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Voice Controller (VOCON) Board Before Changes After Changes No changes Vocon board PCB layout (Top) Vocon board PCB layout (Top) No changes VOCON board without shield (Top) VOCON board without shield (Top) ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061

* Changes are marked in yellow box. Orange box indicates the sections under the shield. Voice Controller (VOCON) Board Before Changes After Changes Controller 3.6V Switching Regulator Vocon board PCB layout (Bottom) Vocon board PCB layout (Bottom) VOCON board without shield (Bottom) VOCON board without shield (Bottom) ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Expansion Board Before Changes After Changes BT/WLAN Audio PA Circuit Expansion board PCB layout (Top) Expansion board PCB layout (Top) Expansion board without shield (Top) Expansion board without shield (Top) ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Expansion Board Before Changes After Changes 3.3V LDO Audio PA Circuit PMIC Circuits Expansion board PCB layout (Bottom) BT/WLAN Power Management Circuit Expansion board PCB layout (Bottom) Expansion board without shield (Bottom) Expansion board without shield (Bottom) ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13D

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST January 14, 2022 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd is requesting that Exhibit 4 (Block Diagram), Exhibit 5

(Schematic Diagrams), Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures), and Exhibit 12

(Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions considers the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 4, 5, 10, and 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certifcation Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT7061/ IC: 109U-89FT7061 EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) 2.1 Statement of Certification type described herein Transceiver in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. This device is P25 Compliant as well which meets FCC Part 90.548 and RSS 119 Section 5.11 as declared in exhibit 12.

(AZ489FT7061/109U-89FT7061) is Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME:

Afiq Jamani SIGNATURE:

DATE:

23th December 2021 TITLE:

Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT7061/ IC: 109U-89FT7061 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C and ISED RSS 247 regulations. Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal Part 15.247 (g) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. NAME:

Muhammad Aiman Ismail SIGNATURE:

DATE:

TITLE:

23th December 2021 Electrical Engineer EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2 Declaration Date: December 23, 2021 This WLAN/Bluetooth is a WLAN/Bluetooth combination antenna with FCC/IC To whom it may concern, ID:

This AZ489FT7061/109U-89FT7061. co-existence mechanism is to ensure that the WLAN and Bluetooth transmitters would not simultaneously operate. Therefore, WLAN and Bluetooth antenna in FCC/IC ID: AZ489FT7061/109U-89FT7061 should not be considered to be able to transmit simultaneously. Though the users can use WLAN and Bluetooth simultaneously, but the real situation is that WLAN and Bluetooth are used by time sharing and no overlap transmission. Should you have any question, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours,

Name: Afiq Jamani Title: Engineering Manager E-mail: afiq.jamani@motorolasolutions.com Date: December 23, 2021 that the device, FCC Declaration ID:

Inc., declare We, Motorola Solutions, AZ489FT7061, does not support any non-US channels in all the operational mode(s) in the US market. All non-US frequencies, US 2.4G channel 12-13 and Country code selection are disabled through proprietary software and are not user changeable. Should you have any question or comment regarding this matter, please do not hesitate to contact me. Sincerely yours,

Name: Afiq Jamani Title: Engineering Manager E-mail: afiq.jamani@motorolasolutions.com

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 January 14, 2022 Authorization & Evaluation Division Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ489FT7061. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter is designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band/Mode VHF UHF Range 1 UHF Range 2 700 800 Bluetooth Bluetooth Low Energy Wi-Fi/ WLAN Frequency ranges 136-174 MHz 380-470 MHz 450-520 MHz 764-776 MHz, 794-806 MHz 806-825 MHz, 851-870 MHz 2402 2480 MHz 2402 2480 MHz 2412 2462 MHz FCC rule parts 22, 74, 80, 90 22, 74, 80, 90 22, 74, 80, 90 90 90 15C 15C 15C To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 22, 74, 80, and 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 22, 74, 80 and 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e) and 80.203(b), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13C FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Frequency Range

(MHz) 136-150.8*

150.8-152.855 152.855-154 154-156.2475 156.2475-157.1875 157.1875-157.45 157.45-161.575 161.575-161.625 161.625-161-775 161.775-161.9625 161.9625-162.025 162.025-162.0375*

162.0375-173.4 173.4-174*

380-406 406.1-450 450-454 454-456 456-460 460-462.5375 462.5375-462.7375*

462.7375-467.5375 467.5375-467.7375 467.7375-470 470-512 512-520 764-768 768-769*

769-775 775-776*

792-798 798-799*

799-805 805-806*

806-809 809-824 824-825 851-854 854-869 869-870

*Canada Part 22 x x x Part 74 x x x x x x x Part 80 x x x x x x x x x x x Part 90 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Federal x x x x x x x x x Other Regions x x x x x x x x x x x Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, ____________________ Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13C

 

 

Certification Department Date: 14 January 2022 Subject: Application Authorization for FCC/IC filing To Whom It May Concern:

I hereby authorize Arine Lee to apply, on my behalf, the application for the following FCC/IC ID:

FCC/IC ID: AZ489FT7061 / 109U-89FT7061 Please contact me if there are any questions or issues. Regards, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager Tel: (954) 723 4707 Email: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ____________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc, 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Date: January 14, 2022 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Class 2 Permissive Change to FCC Authorized Transceiver with FCC ID:

AZ489FT7061 Dear Sir/Madam, A permissive change is requested for the subject transceiver which is marketed in the United States and elsewhere. A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:

1) Replacing the current WLAN/BT IC and its supporting circuitries with new replacement and supporting design optimization circuitries. The components changes are made within the Bluetooth (BT)/ WLAN circuitries as below:

i) BT/WLAN chipset for BT/WLAN functionality from NXP IC001201A01 has 2 Vendor P/N Semiconductor and 88W8987-A2-EAH2E005-P123 from Marvell Semiconductor. Both Vendor P/N are referring to the same chipset/part. Marvell BT/Wifi business was acquired by NXP. Inclusion of 38.4MHz temperature compensated crystal oscillator (TCXO) for BT/WLAN IC reference clock listed; 88W8987-A2-EAHE/AZ ii) iii) BT/WLAN bandpass filter (passive component) change to cater for new BT/WLAN IC requirement iv) Value change on the passive components (capacitors, resistors and inductors) 2) Replacing the components on the controller section (non RF) to support the WLAN/BT IC changes. The changes are as below:

Inclusion of PM823HN PMIC for power management 3.3V LDO change to cater for new BT/WLAN IC requirement 3.6V Switching Regulator change to cater for new BT/WLAN IC requirement i) ii) iii) iv) Value change on the passive components (capacitors, resistors and inductors) 3) Added passive and protection components for UL certification requirement on Audio PA circuit. 4) Added as dual source with the existing parts due to multiple supply constraints with the current parts lead time increased to 99 weeks which causing immediate line down. There is no change to the radio electrically and the replacement parts are pin-to-pin comparable with the current parts. ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13A Old Part Number New Part Number 4870370A72 CR001795A01 5109522E84 LD000335A01 5103535B53 LD000329A01 51009345001 LD000331A01 B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 Description Where Used Peripheral GCAI circuit (VBUS), as a switch Zener Diode

(Non RF) Buffer (Non RF) Controller Connector, as a buffer Inverter (Non RF) NOR Gate (Non RF) Controller GCAI schematic, a logic inverter Controller Low Frequency pairing circuit, as a logic gate There is no degradation observed on EMC for LMR, BTLE, and WIFI except BT has degraded as compared to the previous filing but the data continues to be compliant to the FCC limits. No degradation found on the EME. C. CONCLUSION:

This radio continues to meet all FCC requirements for which authorization was granted, thus this change does meet requirements of a Class-2 Permissive Change. Sincerely, _____________ Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13A

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FC CC ID: AZ489 9FT7061 CONFIDENT TIALITY REQ QUEST 10, 2020 ngineering and Division Authorization atory nd Mills Road d MD 21046 d Technology y Branch Madam, onfidentiality R Request for T ransmitter wit th FCC ID: AZ Z489FT7061 olutions Inc is Procedures) he informatio 459 and Sect s requesting not be mad n in these ex tion 552(b)(4) that Exhibit e routinely a xhibits to be

) of the Freed 5 (Schematic available for classified as dom of Inform c Diagrams), public inspe trade secret ation Act. and Exhibit ection. Motor s, pursuant t 10 (Parts Lis rola Solution to 47 CFR Se st and ns Inc ection k Exhibits 5 a and 10 as Co onfidential. tact me if you require any a additional info ormation. kharia Compliance M anna.zakharia Manager a@motorolas solutions.com Novermber Office of En Laboratory Equipment A FCC Labora 7435 Oakla Columbia, M Subject: Co Dear Sir / M Motorola So Tune Up P considers th 0.457(d), 0. Please mark Please cont Sincerely, Deanna Zak Regulatory E-mail : Dea ____________ Motorola Solut ______________ tions Inc. 8000 W ______________ West Sunrise Bou ______________ ulevard, Fort Lau _____________ uderdale, Florida 33322 ______________ ______________ ______________ EXHIB ______ BIT 13B

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 November 23, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: APPLICATION FOR CLASS 2 PERMISSIVE CHANGE TO FCC AUTHORIZED Transceiver with FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 APX8000 ALL BAND (7/800, VHF, UHF) PORTABLE Dear Sir/Madam, A permissive change is requested for APX8000 ALL BAND (7/800, VHF, UHF) Portable (the subject transceiver) which is marketed in the United States and elsewhere. A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:

The subject transceiver has an existing part replacement due to End of Life (EOL) which the component changes are made within Transmitter, Receiver and DC supply section, which are all passive components in the LMR section. There is no change to the radio electrically. There is an oscillator chipset and VCO module replacement made within Frequency Generation Unit (FGU) in the LMR section. There is no change to the radio electrically. The changes are:-

pin-to-pin compatible has the same basic function as the previous chip no change in radio parameters (electrically identical) B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:

EME & EMC has been assessed and no degradation found. In the EMC report, all channels and modulations were evaluated and that the worst case performance is presented in the report. There is no impact to BT/WIFI performance due to no changes were involved on these sections. C. CONCLUSION:

This radio continues to meet all FCC emissions requirements for which authorization was granted. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail : Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT7061 November10,2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject:ExtendedFrequenciesJustificationforCertificationofTransmitterwithFCCID:AZ489FT7061 DearSir/Madam:

Thistransmitterwasdesignedtooperateinthefollowingfrequencyranges:

Band/Mode VHF UHFRange1 UHFRange2 700 800 Bluetooth WiFi Frequencyranges 136174MHz 380470MHz 450520MHz 764776MHz,794806MHz 806825MHz,851870MHz 24022480MHz 24002483.5MHz FCCruleparts 22,74,80,90 22,74,80,90 22,74,80,90 90 90 15C 15C To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range underFCCRuleParts22,74,80,and90ontheFCCGrant. FortheFCCsRuleParts22,74,80and90applications,thisradioisusedinsystemsbyFederalandPublic SafetyagenciesincludingPolice,Fire,andEmergencyMedicalServices,etc.asindicatedinthetablebelow. EquipmentprogrammingistheresponsibilityofAuthorizedServicePersonnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e) and 80.203(b), in that the operator cannot directly programthetransmitfrequenciesusingthenormallyaccessibleexternalcontrols. PertheFCCsKDB634817guidance,asanalternativetolistingtheexactfrequencies,weacknowledgethat itsaviolationoftheFCCRulesifthisdeviceoperatesonunauthorizedfrequencies. FrequencyRange(MHz) Part22 Part74 Part80 Part90 Federal 136 150.8*

150.8 152.855 152.855 - 154 154 156.2475 156.2475 157.1875 157.1875 157.45 157.45 161.575 161.575 161.625 161.625 161 - 775 161.775 161.9625 161.9625 162.025 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C FCC C ID: AZ489F FT7061 x x x x x x x x 75*

375 375 460 462.53 462.7 467.5 46 025 162.037 75*

162.0 4

.0375 173.4 162 1 73.4 174*

3 380 406.1 4 406.1 - 450 450 - 454 454 - 456 456 - 460 0 462.5375 375 462.737 375 467.53 375 467.73 7.7375 - 470 470 - 512 512 - 520 7 768 769*

769 - 775 799 - 805 8 805 806*

806 - 809 809 - 824 851 - 854 854 - 869 ada

* Cana x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x ntactmeifyo ourequireda anyadditiona linformation

. Pleaseco Sincerely, DeannaZ Regulator Email:D akharia ryCompliance eanna.zakhar eManager ria@motorol asolutions.co om _________ Motorola So ____________ olutions Inc. 8000 _____________ 0 West Sunrise B ____________ Boulevard, Fort L _____________ Lauderdale, Florid ____________ da 33322 _____________ ____________ _________ E EXHIBIT 13C

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT7061/ IC: 109U-89FT7061

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ489FT7061/109U-89FT7061) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. This device is P25 Compliant as well which meets FCC Part 90.548 and RSS 119 Section 5.11 as declared in exhibit 12. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: Adrian Kang SIGNATURE:

DATE: 25th Sep 2020 TITLE: Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant:

: Motorola So olutions Inc F FCC ID: AZ48 89FT7061/ IC C: 109U-89FT 7061 2.2 Atte estation Stat tement (Equi ipment Class s DTS and D SS Bluetoo oth/WiFi) This app s device cont plicable FCC P tains an emb Part 15C and bedded Blueto ISED RSS 2 ooth device a 247 regulation and WiFi dev ns. vice that are compliant wit th the Par rt 15.247 (a)(1 1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hop Each fre The rece The rece ping sequenc equency must eivers input b eiver hops in ce must be ps t be used equ andwidth is a sequence wit seudo random ually on the av approximately th the transm m. verage by eac y equal to the itted signal ch transmitter r dwidth transmit band Par rt 15.247 (g) /

/ RSS 247 Se ection 5.1 The sys transmitt stem is desig ter is present gned to comp ed with a con ply with all o ntinuous data of the regula

(or informatio tions in this on) section whe en the Pa rt 15.247(h) /

/ RSS 247 Se ection 5.1 stem does n cy hopping ncy of individu not coordinat systems for ual hopping fr te its chann the expres equencies by el selection/

ss purpose o y multiple tran

/hopping seq of avoiding nsmitters. quence with the simultan other neous The sys frequenc occupan NAM ME: Wei Loon n Yeoh SIG GNATURE:

DAT TE: 25th Sep 2 2020 TIT LE: Electrical l Engineer EXHIB SHEET 2 BIT 2 OF 2